JP2019208917A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that increases game interest regarding a performance state.SOLUTION: In a meter performance, a meter image is changed from a first timing to a fourth timing. There are a non-operation system performance that does not require an operation and an operation system performance that requires an operation, and the ratio of which one of the operation system performance and the non-operation system performance is executed is different. Variable winning means is provided so that a game medium shot after being notified that a state is to be controlled to a specific state cannot be won. The ratio that a variable display that is not a trigger to be controlled to an advantageous state in a special state is controlled to the specific state after the variable display is executed by a second variable display pattern, in the special state, is lower than the ratio that the variable display is controlled to the specific state after the variable display is executed by a first variable display pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-6

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  As the gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which the production state (level gauge 93) can change toward a specific state (level maximum) at a plurality of timings in a predetermined period.

JP2013-208496A

  In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, for example, the effect state changes only based on the player's action (the operation of making a game ball win a big winning opening and the operation button is repeatedly hit), and the effect state changes. However, it was monotonous and was not enough to improve the fun of gaming.

  An object of this invention is to provide the game machine which improved the interest of the game regarding the production state.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine or the like) that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state), and a detection means (for example, a push button 31B or the like) that can detect a player's action When the production state (for example, meter image 60AK002) is changed to the specific state (for example, the state where the meter is full (FIG. 8-10 (E))), the specific production (for example, super reach B). ) To perform the specific effect at a plurality of timings (for example, a first timing to a fourth timing) in a predetermined period. A first change pattern (for example, an operation system effect, etc.) that can be changed toward and changes based on detection of the player's movement by the detecting means The second change pattern (for example, a non-operation system effect, etc.) that changes without detecting the player's movement by the detection means can be changed (FIGS. 8-6, 8-9, FIG. 8). -10), and at least two timings of the plurality of timings, the ratio of whether the presentation state changes between the first change pattern and the second change pattern is different (for example, the first timing). The ratio of whether the operation system effect or the non-operation system effect is executed is different at each of the fourth timing (FIG. 8-6, etc.), and further, the first state in which the game medium can be won and the game medium are The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022) that can be changed to the second state where the winning is impossible or difficult is different from the advantageous state, and the variable winning means is in the first state. Turn into Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including a special state, and a special state as compared with the normal state Special state control means (for example, steps S902208A, S90211A, S902212A in the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, the KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled by the state. S902209B, S90210B, S902213B, S902214B), and the variable winning means is informed that the game medium launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won after being notified that the special winning state is controlled. Provided (example For example, the nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds). The variable display that is not triggered by the advantageous state is represented by a first variable display pattern whose variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27 of shortening variation), and the variable display period The second variable display pattern that is a second period longer than the first period (for example, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28 including a continuous effect) can be executed, and in a special state, the second variable display pattern The ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed is lower than the ratio controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern ( In example, when the Koatari the proportion of relatively change time is determined in the long second fluctuation pattern # 28 (not or determined) low. (See FIG. 23).

  According to such a configuration, a pattern that does not depend on the player's action is prepared as the change pattern of the production state, and the change pattern in which the production state changes is changed at two or more timings. Changes in the production state can be diversified, and the interest of the game is improved with respect to the production state. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered and to enhance the effect of production.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), when the performance state changes with the first change pattern, a promotion effect that promotes the player's action (for example, an image of “Smash!”, “Press! ”And a button image 60AK005 (FIGS. 8-9, 8-10), etc.), for example, the promotion effect executing means (for example, the effect control board 12), Different promotion effects at different timings of at least two of a plurality of timings (for example, changing the mode of the button image 60AK005 for “small button continuous hit”, “middle button”, “large button” executed at different timings) May be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the action by the player is promoted by the promotion effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the performance state has a variable number of timings depending on whether or not the specific performance is executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-12). ).

  According to such a configuration, the player comes to pay attention to the timing of the change of the production state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), a predetermined effect (for example, “+10 Pt!” Or the like that differs depending on the stage after the change or the amount of change when the effect state is changed. It further includes predetermined effect execution means (for example, the effect control board 12) for executing an image for informing the addition point, an image for informing that the meter such as “Meter MAX !!!!” is full, etc. It may be.

  According to such a structure, the information regarding the production state can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (4), special effect execution means for executing a special effect (for example, a meter suggestion effect or the like) using the detection means before shifting to the predetermined period. (For example, an effect control board 12 or the like), and depending on whether or not the special effect is executed, the ratio of shifting to the predetermined period is different (for example, FIG. 8-5). Good.

  According to such a configuration, the player pays attention even before the predetermined period, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), specific display means for displaying a specific display (for example, the button image 60AK005) corresponding to the detection means (for example, the effect control board 12) The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a medium-sized button image 60AK005) and a second specific display (for example, a large-sized button image that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific display). Button image 60AK005 etc., and the specific display is an effect that acts on the first specific display (for example, an effect that a star image 60AK009 acts on a medium-sized button image 60AK005 (FIG. 8-10 (C )) And the like) can be changed to the second specific display (for example, the button image 6 by the action of the star image 60AK009). Such as the AK005 is changed to the large size), it may be so.
Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following means 7-11. Conventionally, a game medium is fired after a game machine has been informed of being controlled in a special state as disclosed in JP-A-2006-5513 (for example, after a small hit symbol has been derived and displayed). Even so, it is conceivable that the variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball apparatus) is configured not to be awarded. However, when variable display with a long variable display period is being executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation. Therefore, if such a configuration is simply combined, even if the variable display with a long variable display period is executed and then controlled to a special state, the game medium cannot be won by the variable winning means, and the effect is enhanced. On the contrary, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the interest from being lowered and can enhance the effect.

(7) The gaming machine of the means 7 according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state). A variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable winning ball device 9022) that can be changed to a second state that is impossible or difficult to win, is different from the advantageous state, and the variable winning means Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including changing to one state; Special state control means (for example, controllable to a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is controlled more frequently than the special state. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes steps S902208A, S90211A, S902212A, S902209B, S90210B, S902213B, and S902214B). Provided so that game media launched toward the variable winning means cannot be won (for example, a nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is opened in the small hit game. A variable display that is not triggered by the advantageous state in the special state is realized by setting a variable display period to a first variable display pattern (for example, a first period). Second variation pattern of shortening variation # 25, # 27) and a second variable display pattern in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28 including a continuous effect). In the special state, the ratio that is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. (For example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined for the second variation pattern # 28 having a relatively long variation time is low (or not determined), see FIG. 59).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating and enhance the effect.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7), when the special state is controlled, promotion notification means capable of executing promotion notification (for example, right-hand notification) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route (For example, it is realized by displaying a character display of “right-handed” or an arrow indicating the right direction in the effect display device 909), and the promotion notification means can perform variable display using a first variable display pattern. The promotion notification may be executed in a different manner between when it is being executed and when variable display is being executed according to the second variable display pattern (for example, a relatively variable time in the KT state). When the fluctuation display is executed with a long fluctuation pattern (that is, the second fluctuation pattern # 26, # 28), the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation pattern). 25, # 27) Compared to when the variable display is executed, the “right-handed” character display, the arrow display indicating the right direction, etc. are reduced or made transparent and displayed positively. You may not be prompted to hit it.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute suitable promotion notification according to the situation.

(9) In any one of the above gaming machines (7) to (8), a storage means (for example, a hit ball supply tray 903 or a surplus ball receiving tray 904) capable of storing a game medium and the storage means are in a full state. A full tank notification means (for example, realized by displaying a character “full tank error” on the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound) capable of performing a full tank notification indicating that there is a certain amount. The full tank notification means may be able to vary the execution mode of the full tank notification when it is controlled to the advantageous state and when it is controlled to the special state ( For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the “full tank error” is small, the error volume is small, etc.) compared to the big hit game state. In the big hit gaming state, when the storage amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, a full tank notification is executed. In the second KT state, when the storage amount exceeds the second predetermined amount greater than the first predetermined amount, Notification may be executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable full tank notification according to the situation.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9), in the special state, the special state is controlled again based on execution of the next variable display after being controlled to the special state. Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a continuous small hit effect) (for example, a part for executing steps S90933 and S90944 in accordance with the process table selected in step S90928 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) You may make it provide.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game related to the special state, and to improve the interest for the game.

(11) In any one of the above gaming machines (7) to (10), a count display (for example, a prize) is made based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, that a game ball has won a big prize opening or a special prize opening 9024). Counting display execution means (for example, the part that executes step S90707 in the effect control microcomputer 90200) capable of updating and displaying the number of balls), and the counting display execution means until the updated count result is displayed. The count display can be updated and displayed by the first pattern whose period is the first specific period and the second pattern whose second period is longer than the first specific period until the updated count result is displayed. There is a display (for example, when the winning ball number display 90300 is displayed in a big hit pattern, the number of winning balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the second K To display the winning balls number display 90305 in pattern, the second speed (e.g., 0.5 second) may be performed to display to increase the prize number balls one by one in) as.
According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when performing the update display of the count display.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved and the interest of the game is improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the main fluctuation patterns. It is a figure which shows relationships, such as the execution period of meter production, meter suggestion production, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B. It is a figure which shows the time-sequential position of the 1st timing-4th timing in meter production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a meter suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the content, determination ratio, etc. of the execution pattern of meter production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the time-sequential relationship between the operation timing in 1st timing-4th timing, and the subsequent production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production screen of meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production screen of meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect screen of a meter suggestion effect. It is an example of determining the number of times of change timing of the meter effect according to the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect screen which concerns on a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect screen which concerns on a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect screen which concerns on a modification. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of the variation pattern of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change process in a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation continuous effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during small hits. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of KT alerting | reporting and a small hit alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a restriction | limiting of KT alerting | reporting and a small hit alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the relationship between the content of pending | holding memory | storage, and the restriction | limiting of KT alerting | reporting and a small hit alert | report. It is a flowchart which shows a reservation continuous effect control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the production timing of the effect in the small hit game in the 2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous small hit effect. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the production timing of a continuous small hit production.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by moving the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting point). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the upper open limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the “small hit” may be provided with the small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which the time reduction control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time reduction control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also referred to as a high accuracy low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special figure game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. You may make it perform a pseudo-continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating operation contents as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power failure to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the ordinary figure holding memory 25C is turned on to display the number of ordinary symbols stored.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for making various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Explanation regarding feature 60AK)
Next, the characteristic part 60AK of the present embodiment will be described.

(Variation pattern)
In the feature part 60AK, a variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-1 is mainly used. Here, PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4 are prepared as variation patterns at the time of loss. Moreover, PB3-2 to PB3-4 are prepared as variation patterns at the time of big hit. Note that, in the feature portion 60AK, a small hit or the like may be omitted.

  PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a shortened pattern (a pattern selected at the time-shortening control) in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than normal (PA1-1). PA 3-2 to PA 3-4 and PB 3-2 to PB 3-4 specify reach. PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify normal reach (no development) as a reach effect to be executed at the time of reach, and PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify super reach A as a reach effect, and PA3-4 and PB3- 4 designates super reach B as the reach production.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 performs lottery by a variation pattern determination random value (one of game random numbers) and a variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 101. The variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure game to be executed is determined (selected) as one of the variation patterns. The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is set to increase in the order of PA1-1 or PA2-1 (selected only during short-time control)> PA3-2> PA3-3> PA3-4 when lost. . At the time of big hit, it is set to be higher in the order of PB3-4> PB3-3> PB3-2. The non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1 or PA2-1) is a loss determination. In addition, the expectation degree of jackpot for reach production is set higher in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach (no development). In the time-shortening control, PA2-1 having a short special figure fluctuation time is easily selected, and the average special figure fluctuation time is shorter than when the time-shortening control is not performed. When CPU 103 determines the variation pattern, CPU 103 transmits an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating the determined variation pattern to effect control board 12.

  Although detailed processing will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 executes normal reach when the variation pattern designation command designates the variation pattern PA3-2 or PB3-2. When the variation pattern designation command designates any of the variation patterns PA3-3, PB3-3, PA3-3, and PB3-3, the effect control CPU 120 executes normal reach and then changes normal reach to super reach A or Develop into B.

(Meter effect and meter suggestion effect)
As shown in FIG. 8A, when developing from normal reach to super reach A or B (when the variation pattern is PA3-3, PB3-3, PA3-3, or PB3-3), meter effect Is executed (FIGS. 8-2 (B) and (C)). The meter effect is an effect that is executed as part of the reach effect and inquires whether or not the super reach that develops from the normal reach becomes the super reach B. The meter effect is an effect of accumulating (adding) points (Pt) in the meter image 60AK002 (FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10) displayed on the image display device 5 (FIGS. 8-9, FIG. 8-10). When the points are accumulated up to the upper limit (here, 100 Pt) and the meter image 60AK002 is full, the meter effect is successful and the development to super reach B is performed (FIG. 8-2 (B)). On the other hand, if the points are not accumulated to the upper limit (here, 100 Pt) and the meter image 60AK002 does not become full, the meter effect fails and the development to super reach A is performed (FIG. 8-2 (C)). Super Reach B has a higher expectation level for jackpots, so it would be nice for a player to have a successful meter production. When the normal reach is not developed into the super reach (when the variation pattern is PA3-2 or PB3-2), the meter effect is not executed (FIG. 8-2 (A)).

  In this feature 60AK, a meter suggestion effect (FIGS. 8-11) that suggests whether or not a meter effect is executed is also executed. Since the meter suggestion effect is executed at the time of normal reach execution, it can be executed even when there is no development to super reach (FIG. 8-2).

(Meter production)
In the meter effect, as shown in FIG. 8C, the first timing to the fourth timing are set as the timing for accumulating points in the meter image 60AK002 (here, the concept of the period is included). As the effects that can be executed at each timing among the meter effects, "automatic addition", "small button continuous hitting", "medium button", and "large button" effects are prepared. The meter effect is a battle effect in which the friend character 60AK003 and the enemy character 60AK004 fight, and points are accumulated according to the progress of the battle (the progress of each effect from the first timing to the fourth timing) (FIG. 8-9). And FIG. 8-10).

  “Automatic addition” is an effect of automatically accumulating points without accepting an operation from the player (the points are gradually accumulated as the battle progresses) (FIGS. 8-9 (D)-(F)) It is. In “automatic addition”, the total points accumulated in the “automatic addition” (here, the total number of added points) are also notified (image of “+5 Pt!” In FIG. 8-9 (F)).

  “Small Button Strike” displays an image of “Let's Strike!” And a small-sized button image 60AK005 imitating the push button 31B as an effect image for promoting the operation, and the number of repeated hits on the push button 31B is displayed. This is an effect of accumulating points in the meter image 60AK002 when the predetermined number of times is reached (FIGS. 8-9 (B)-(C)). In “small button continuous hitting”, when points are accumulated, the fact (here, the number of added points) is also notified (“+10 Pt!” Image in FIG. 8-9 (C)). The case where the number of consecutive hits has not reached the predetermined number will be described later.

  The “middle button” displays an image of “press!” And a medium-sized button image 60AK005 imitating the push button 31B as an effect image for promoting the operation, and the push button 31B is pressed. It is an effect that sometimes accumulates points in the meter image 60AK002 (FIGS. 8-10 (A)-(B)). In the “middle button”, when points are accumulated, the fact (here, the number of added points) is also notified (“+35 Pt!” Image in FIG. 8-10 (B)). Note that the case where the push button 31B is not pressed will be described later.

  “Large button” displays an image of “Press!” And a large-sized button image 60AK005 simulating the push button 31B as an effect image for promoting the operation, and the push button 31B is pressed. It is an effect that sometimes accumulates points in the meter image 60AK002 (FIGS. 8-10 (D)-(F)). In the “large button”, when points are accumulated, the fact (here, the number of added points) is also notified (“+50 Pt!” Image in FIG. 8-10 (E)). Note that the case where the push button 31B is not pressed will be described later.

  Among the above effects, “small button repeated hits”, “middle button”, and “large button” are sometimes referred to as operation system effects because points are added according to the operation. “Automatic addition” automatically adds points (because no operation is required), so it may be a non-operational effect.

  In the meter effect, when the meter image 60AK002 is full, the fact that the meter image 60AK002 is full is notified (image of “Meter MAX!” In FIG. 8-10 (E)), and then to Super Reach B. The development of this is done as part of the meter production. In the meter production, if the meter image 60AK002 is not full, a message to that effect is given (for example, “unfortunately” image), and then the development of Super Reach A is part of the meter production. As done.

  The effects executed at each of the first timing to the fourth timing are preset according to the execution pattern of the meter effects (FIG. 8-6), and are determined collectively at the start of variable display.

(Meter suggestion)
The meter suggestion effect displays a suggestion image 60AK011 indicating whether the meter effect is executed, and suggests the start of the meter effect while prompting the player's operation (pressing operation to the push button 31B) (FIGS. 8-11). ). In the meter suggestion effect, an image (such as “there is a possibility of starting the meter effect!”) Indicating that the meter effect is started is displayed by an operation on the push button 31B. When there is no operation, the suggestion image 60AK011 is deleted. When a meter effect is executed (when a super reach is executed), if there is an operation on the push button 31B, an image ("Meter effect execution!" Etc.) may be displayed. If the meter effect is not executed (in the case of normal reach (no development)), if there is an operation on the push button 31B, an image ("unfortunate ..." etc.) that informs that the meter effect is not executed after that is displayed. May be.

(Variable display start setting process)
The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 8D in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of FIG.

  First, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the variable display change pattern to be executed (hereinafter referred to as the current change pattern) and the variable display result to be executed from now on (hereinafter referred to as the current variable display result). (Determine decorative pattern) is determined (step 60AKS101). The variation pattern and the variable display result are specified by the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the display result designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display and analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery means a determination method using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 (the same applies hereinafter). As the random value, one of the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random number update process is used (hereinafter, the same applies to the lottery).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is one that specifies reach (PA3-2 to PA3-4, PB3-2 to PB3-4) (step 60AKS102). When the reach is designated (step 60AKS102; Yes), the execution of the meter suggestion effect is determined by lottery (step 60AKS103). The determination ratio of execution / non-execution is set to the ratio shown in FIG. 8-5. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 specifies that the current variation pattern specifies normal reach (no development) (PA3-2, PB3-2) or superreach (PA3-3-3 PA3-4, Whether or not to execute the meter suggestion effect is determined at a different rate depending on whether the PB3-3 to PB3-4). Here, it is easy to execute the meter suggestion effect in the case of super reach. That is, the execution rate of the meter suggestion effect is higher when the meter effect is executed than when the meter effect is not executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern specifies super reach (step 60AKS104). When the super reach is designated (step 60AKS104; Yes), the meter effect is executed because the super reach is executed by the variable display in the future. At this time, the execution pattern of the meter effect is determined by lottery (step 60AKS105).

  The contents of each execution pattern of the meter effect and the determination ratio of each execution pattern are shown in FIG.

  In each column of the first timing to the fourth timing in FIG. 8-6, the names of effects to be executed at the current timing (“automatic addition”, “small button continuous hit”, “medium button”, “large button”) Is described. Each effect is as described above.

  A point (Pt) in parentheses in each column of the first timing to the fourth timing is a point added at that timing (in the case of an operation system effect, a point added when there is an operation. The same applies to points below). As shown in FIG. 8-6, points to be added in the effects executed at the first timing to the fourth timing are predetermined by the execution pattern.

  The list of total points is the total of points added in each effect executed at the first timing to the fourth timing. Execution patterns ME01, ME03, ME05, ME07, and ME09 in which the total points reach 100 points are execution patterns for successful meter effects because the meter image 60AK002 is full (100 points are full). Execution patterns ME02, ME04, ME06, ME08, and ME10) having a total point of less than 100 points are execution patterns of failure meter effects because the meter image 60AK002 does not reach full (100 points are full).

  In “automatic addition”, 5 points are added (points are gradually added (for example, every 0.1 point), and 5 points are added in total). In “small button continuous hitting”, 10 points are added when there is a continuous hitting operation. In the “middle button”, 35 points are added when an operation is performed. In the case of the “middle button” executed at the fourth timing, if the meter production is successful, 50 points are added when there is an operation, and the meter operation is performed when all the operation system productions before that are operated. The image 60AK002 is filled up (see ME05 and ME06). When the meter effect is successful, the “large button” is incremented by 50 points or 80 points when the operation is performed, and the meter image 60AK002 is full when all the operation system effects before that are operated. (For 50 points, refer to ME01 and ME03. For 80 points, refer to ME09). For the “large button” when the meter effect is unsuccessful, 45 points are added when there is an operation.

  If there is no operation despite the operation system effect being executed, the meter image 60AK002 cannot be filled up even if the meter effect is a successful meter effect. In that case, at a predetermined timing after the fourth timing, a point obtained by subtracting the current point number from the upper limit point (here, 100 Pt) of the meter image 60AK002 is stored in the meter image 60AK002 (that is, the meter image 60AK002 is stored). Then, a development effect that develops into Super Reach B (hereinafter referred to as a “point full tank special effect”) is performed as part of the meter effect. When the meter effect is a failed meter effect (that is, when the meter image 60AK002 need not be full), the special effect is not executed.

  For example, when the meter effect is executed with the execution pattern ME01, the effect of “small button continuous hit” is executed at the first timing, the effect of “automatic addition” is executed at the second timing, and the “middle button” at the third timing. The effect of “large button” is executed at the fourth timing. When there are operations in all operation system effects, the points accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 increase from 10 points → 15 points → 50 points → 100 points. When there is no operation with at least one operation system effect, a point obtained by subtracting the current number of points from the upper limit point (here, 100 Pt) of the meter image 60AK002 is stored in the meter image 60AK002 after the fourth timing. Thereafter, the development effect for Super Reach B is executed. These series of effects constitute a meter effect.

  When the meter effect is executed with the execution pattern ME02, the effect of “small button continuous hit” is executed at the first timing, the effect of “automatic addition” is executed at the second timing, and the effect of “middle button” is executed at the third timing. , And the “big button” effect is executed at the fourth timing. When there are operations in all operation system effects, the points accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 increase from 10 points → 15 points → 50 points → 95 points. Even if there is no operation in at least one operation system effect, the meter effect in the execution pattern is a failed meter effect, and thus no special effect is executed. Thereafter, the development effect for Super Reach A is executed. These series of effects constitute a meter effect.

  In step 60AKS105, when the current variation pattern is Super Reach A, the production control CPU 120 determines one of the failure meter production execution patterns ME02, ME04, ME06, ME08, and ME10 as the current meter production execution pattern. (select. The determination ratio of each execution pattern is set to the ratio shown in FIG. 8-6.

  In step 60AKS105, when the current variation pattern is Super Reach B, the production control CPU 120 selects one of the successful meter production execution patterns ME01, ME03, ME05, ME07, and ME09 (unsuccessful meter production execution pattern). Determine (select) the execution pattern of the current meter production. The determination ratio of each execution pattern is set to the ratio shown in FIG. 8-6.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6, each determination ratio of the execution patterns ME02, ME04, ME06, ME08, and ME10 (execution pattern of the failure meter effect) is equal (20/100 for each). On the other hand, each determination ratio or the total of the determination ratios of the execution patterns ME01, ME03, and ME09 (execution patterns of successful meter effects and the “large button” executed at the fourth timing) is executed. It is lower than the respective determination ratios or total of the determination ratios of the patterns ME05 and ME07 (execution patterns of successful meter effects that are executed when the “middle button” is executed at the fourth timing). Furthermore, the execution pattern in which “automatic addition” is executed at the fourth timing is only the execution pattern of the failed meter effect (ME10). For this reason, when “automatic addition” is executed at the fourth timing, it does not develop to super reach B (develops only to super reach A), and “middle button” is executed. The rate of development to super reach B is higher when the “large button” is executed. In addition, the rate of development to super reach A is higher when the “middle button” is executed than when the “large button” is executed. The super-reach B has a higher jackpot expectation than the super-reach A, so the “big button” has a higher jackpot expectation than the “medium button” and “automatic addition”. Among the “middle button” and “automatic addition”, the “middle button” has a higher expectation degree of jackpot.

  In addition, the rate at which the operation system effect is executed at the first timing is 40/100 when the variation pattern is either Super Reach A or Super Reach B, and the rate at which the non-operation system effect is executed is: When the variation pattern is either super reach A or super reach B, it is 60/100. The rate at which the operation system effect is executed at the second timing is 60/100 when the fluctuation pattern is either Super Reach A or Super Reach B, and the rate at which the non-operation system effect is executed is the change pattern. Is 40/100 for both Super Reach A and Super Reach B. The rate at which the operation system effect is executed at the third timing is 80/100 when the fluctuation pattern is either Super Reach A or Super Reach B, and the rate at which the non-operation system effect is executed is the change pattern. Is 20/100 for both Super Reach A and Super Reach B. The ratio at which the operation system effect is executed at the fourth timing is 80/100 when the variation pattern is Super Reach A, and is 100/100 when the variation pattern is Super Reach B, and the non-operation system effect is executed. The ratio is 20/100 when the variation pattern is Super Reach A, and 0/100 when the variation pattern is Super Reach B. From the above, at each timing from the first timing to the fourth timing, the ratio of which one of the operation system effect and the non-operation system effect is executed is different.

  Moreover, the point added by operation type | system | group production is at least 10 points or more, and is higher than the point (5 points) added by non-operation type | system | group production.

  Returning to FIG. 8-4, when the current variation pattern does not specify reach (step 60AKS104; No), when the current variation pattern does not specify super reach (step 60AKS104; No), or step 60AKS105. After performing the above, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the reach effect and the like, the aspect of the effect to be executed, and the like (step 60AKS106). Specifically, execution of various effects such as a notice effect by lottery (the effect of notifying the expectation degree of jackpot, and the effect aspect may be different depending on whether it is a high base or a low base). Presence / absence and its mode are determined. At this time, by varying the decision ratio in the lottery according to the current variable display result, the current fluctuation pattern, etc., the jackpot expectation degree (super reach execution expectation according to the presence / absence and execution of the notice effect etc. Different degrees). In addition, when the current fluctuation pattern specifies reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern (the aspect may be changed according to the final stop pattern) is executed (super reach). In the case of execution determination, it is also determined that the meter effect is executed with the execution pattern determined above).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in advance in relation to the start timing (the effect to be executed and the variation pattern) of the effects (reach effect (including meter effect), meter suggestion effect, notice effect, etc.) determined to be executed above. (Step 60AKS107). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 measures the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern, the elapsed time from the execution start of the variable display provided in the production control process timer (RAM 122), and the like. The production control data includes the production specification data for specifying the type and aspect of the production decided to be executed (including the execution pattern of the meter production), and the execution start timing of the production. The timer value stored in the RAM 122 is associated with the execution timing specifying timer value (preliminarily set in relation to the effect to be executed and the fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time)) indicated by comparison with the timer value of the timer. Stored in the area (here, these data function as an effect control pattern). When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specifying data and the execution timing specifying timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

  Thereafter, the CPU 120 for effect control supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol that derives the final stop symbol determined in the manner specified by the current variation pattern (step 60AKS108). Upon receiving the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts variable display of decorative symbols. At this time, the display of the variable display corresponding display may be updated (shift of the hold display, etc.).

  Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” (step 60AKS109), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Processing during variable display)
The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 8-7 in the variable display effect process (step S172) of FIG.

  The effect control CPU 120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and determines whether the timer value after the decrement is 0 or not, so that the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern has elapsed. (Step 60AKS201).

  When the timer value is not 0, that is, when the special figure change time (which is also the execution period of the variable display of the decorative symbol) has not elapsed (step 60AKS201; No), the presentation control CPU 120 is currently in the meter suggested stage. It is determined whether it is an execution start timing (step 60AKS202). Here, the execution timing specifying timer value that matches the timer value of the current effect control process timer is stored in the timer value storage area, and the effect specifying data corresponding to the execution timing specifying timer value is When the effect is specified, it is determined that the present is the start timing of the meter suggestion effect (the same applies to the determination of the execution start timing of the effect). If it is the start timing of the meter suggestion effect (step 60AKS202; Yes), an instruction to start execution of the meter suggestion effect in the form specified by the effect specification data is supplied to the display control unit 123 (step 60AKS203). In response to this instruction, the display control unit 123 starts executing the meter suggestion effect.

  After step 60AKS203, when the present is not the execution start timing of the meter suggestion effect (step 60AKS202; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the present is the execution start timing of the meter effect (step 60AKS204). If it is the start timing of the meter effect (step 60AKS204; Yes), an instruction to start execution of the meter effect in the form specified by the effect specifying data (any one of the execution patterns ME01 to ME10) is supplied to the display control unit 123 (step 60AKS205). ). In response to this instruction, the display control unit 123 starts executing the meter effect.

  After step 60AKS205, when the present is not the start timing of the meter effect (step 60AKS204; No), it is determined whether the present is within the operation reception period in the meter suggestion effect (step 60AKS206). For example, when it is determined to execute the meter suggestion effect, a collection of timer values corresponding to the operation acceptance period (assumed to be predetermined from the relationship with the variation pattern or the like) and a collection of the timer values are The specific data for specifying the suggestive effect is stored in the RAM 122 in association with each other. In step 60AKS206, the production control CPU 120 stores the specific data in the RAM 122, and whether any of the collection of timer values corresponding to the specific data matches the timer value of the production control process timer. If they agree with each other, it is determined that the present is within the operation reception period in the meter suggestion effect (step 60AKS206; Yes). If they do not match, it is determined that it is not within the operation acceptance period (step 60AKS206; No).

  If it is within the operation reception period (step 60AKS206; Yes), it is determined whether or not the push button 31B has been pressed (step 60AKS207). When a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B indicating that an operation on the push button 31B has been detected, it is determined that a pressing operation has been performed. In this case (step 60AKS207; Yes), the display control unit 123 displays an image (such as “there is a possibility of starting the meter effect!”) Indicating that the meter effect is started by operating the push button 31B. (Step 60AKS208). In response to the instruction, the display control unit 123 displays the image on the image display device 5. At this time, since the operation reception period ends, the collection of timer values and the specific data are deleted.

  The determination of the operation reception period (step 60AKS206) may be performed by the effect control CPU 120 inquiring the display control unit 123 whether the current operation reception period is in effect (the same applies to other operation reception periods). ).

  After step 60AKS208, when the present is not the operation acceptance period of the meter suggestion effect (step 60AKS206; No), when there is no operation (step 60AKS207; No), it is determined whether the present is within the operation acceptance period of the meter effect. (Step 60AKS209). For example, when the execution pattern of the meter effect is determined, for all the operation system effects included in the current execution pattern, a collection of timer values corresponding to the operation reception period and the operation system effect provided with the operation reception period Specific data for specifying the type (“small button repeated hit”, “middle button”, “large button”, etc.) is stored in the RAM 122 in association with each other. In step 60AKS206, the production control CPU 120 stores the specific data in the RAM 122, and whether any of the collection of timer values corresponding to the specific data matches the timer value of the production control process timer. If they match, it is determined that the current time is within the operation acceptance period (step 60AKS209; Yes). If they do not match, it is determined that it is not within the operation acceptance period (step 60AKS209; No).

  If it is within the operation reception period (step 60AKS209; Yes), it is determined whether there has been an operation according to the type of operation system effect (step 60AKS210). For example, if the specific data corresponding to the collection of timer values including the timer value that matches the timer value of the effect control process timer specifies “small button repeated hits”, is there a predetermined number of hits on the push button 31B? Determine. For example, the number of times of supply of a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B indicating that an operation on the push button 31B has been detected is counted each time the detection signal is supplied, and the counted value reaches a predetermined number. It is determined that the operation has been performed. When the specific data specifies “middle button” or “large button”, the operation is performed when a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B indicating that an operation on the push button 31B is detected is supplied. It is determined that there was.

  When there is an operation (step 60AKS210; Yes), the display control unit 123 is supplied with an effect start instruction corresponding to the reception of the operation (step 60AKS211). The effect is an effect in which the attack of the friendly character 60AK003 hits the enemy character 60AK004 in the battle, the points are accumulated (added) in the meter image 60AK002, and the number of the added points is notified. The production may be different depending on the etc. The display control unit 123 receives the start instruction and executes the effect for the operation system effect currently being executed (naturally, the effect mode varies depending on the operation system effect being executed). Note that when there is an operation, the operation reception period ends, so the specific data and the timer value used this time are deleted.

  Since each period from the first timing to the fourth timing is fixed and set at the start of variable display, the end timing of the production corresponding to the reception of the operation is the same regardless of the operation timing (first timing to The end timing of the fourth timing is the end timing of the effect (see FIG. 8-8). For this reason, in the effect, it is preferable to perform loop reproduction or the like until the effect end timing for the effect or the like for notifying the added number of points.

  In the processing of steps 60AKS209 to 60AKS211, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the period from the first timing to the fourth timing when the current period is the operation reception period or the operation reception period. It is also possible to inquire about the timing at which and the type of operation system effect, etc., acquire information about the operation reception period, and perform the above-described various processes based on the acquired information.

  After step 60AKS211, if the present is not the operation reception period of the meter effect (step 60AKS209; No), if there is no operation (step 60AKS210; No), the present is set as described above (determined to be executed with the current variable display) It is determined whether it is the start timing of the effect (step 60AKS212). Here, this determination is performed by determining whether or not the execution timing specifying timer value stored in the timer value storage area matches the timer value of the current effect control process timer. If an execution timing specific timer value that matches the timer value of the current effect control process timer is stored in the timer value storage area, it is the start timing of the corresponding effect (including super reach). (Step 60AKS212; Yes), an execution start instruction for the effect specified by the effect specifying data stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the timer value is supplied to the display control unit 123 (Step 60AKS213). The display control unit 123 receives the execution start instruction, and starts the effect specified by the effect specifying data.

  When it is not the execution start timing of the effect (step 60AKS212; No), after step 60AKS213, the variable display in-process is terminated.

  In step 60AKS201, when the timer value is 0, that is, when the special figure variation time has elapsed (step 60AKS201; Yes), it is transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game. It is determined whether or not an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for designating that the fixed decorative design is to be stopped and displayed has been received (step 60AKS214). At this time, if the command is not received (step 60AKS214; No), the variable display effect process is terminated.

  When the symbol confirmation designation command is received (step 60AKS214; Yes), the final stop symbol derivation timing has been reached, and the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) is derived to the display control unit 123 (design stop). (Step 60AKS215). In response to the instruction, the display control unit 123 ends the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 and derives the fixed decorative pattern (variable display result). After that, a predetermined timer provided in the RAM 122 has a timer value corresponding to the reception waiting time of an effect control command (hit start designation command) that designates starting the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state from the main board 11. (Step 60AKS216). Thereby, the reception waiting time is set. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” (step 60AKS217), and the effect process during variable display is ended.

(Example of production screen for meter production)
An example of the effect screen of the meter effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. 8-9 and FIG. 8-10 are examples of the effect screen of the meter effect in the execution pattern ME01. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), when the meter effect starts, a battle in which the teammate character 60AK003 and the enemy character 60AK004 fight is started. At this time, display of a button image 60AK005 simulating the push button 31B is started. Note that the button image 60AK005 to be displayed is still small in size, and is displayed dark or semi-transparent at this point. By being displayed darkly or semi-transparently, it can be notified that the current time is not the operation acceptance period. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the button image 60AK005 is displayed in a dark or translucent state when the operation is not valid. The button image may not be displayed except during the operation reception period.

  Thereafter, with the arrival of the first timing, the effect of “small button continuous hitting” is started (FIG. 8-9 (B)). In the production, an image of “Let's hit continuously!” And a small button image 60AK005 displayed more clearly (brighter or non-transparent) than at the start of the meter production. Are clearly displayed)) as an effect image for promoting the operation. When the number of consecutive hits on the push button 31B reaches a predetermined number of times, the attack of the friendly character 60AK003 hits the enemy character 60AK004, and points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 (FIG. 8-9 (C)). In this case, 10 points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 (the meter level of the meter image 60AK002 (the upper end of the image filled with dots) increases by 10 points). Then, the image “+10 Pt!” Informs that 10 points have been accumulated (added). When the number of consecutive hits does not reach the predetermined number, the hit of the attack and the points are not added, and the effect of “small button repeated hits” is ended as it is.

  When the second timing comes after the end of the first timing, the effect of “automatic addition” is started (FIG. 8-9 (D)). In "automatic addition", points are automatically accumulated without accepting operations from the player. Specifically, the teammate character 60AK003 and the enemy character 60AK004 move or attack each other, and each time the teammate character 60AK003 attacks (weak attack), the points are slightly increased (for example, 0.1 points each). It accumulates (the meter level of the meter image 60AK002 gradually increases) (FIG. 8-9 (E)). At the end of the second timing, the total points accumulated by this “automatic addition” reaches 5 points. At this time, an image of “+5 Pt!” Is displayed, and it is notified that 5 points have been newly accumulated (added) (FIG. 8-9 (F)).

  When the third timing comes after the end of the second timing, the effect of “middle button” is started (FIG. 8-10 (A)). In the “middle button”, an image of “press!” And a medium-sized button image 60AK005 imitating the push button 31B are displayed as effect images for promoting the operation. When there is a pressing operation (once operation) on the push button 31B, the attack of the friendly character 60AK003 hits the enemy character 60AK004, and points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 (FIG. 8-10 (B)). In this case, 35 points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 (the meter level of the meter image 60AK002 increases by 35 points). Then, the image “+35 Pt!” Notifies that 35 points have been newly accumulated (added). If there is no operation, there is no addition of hits and points of the attack, and the production of the “middle button” is ended as it is.

  After the end of the third timing, before the arrival of the fourth timing, the star image 60AK009 acts on the medium-sized button image 60AK005 (it is displayed in dark or translucent because it is outside the operation valid period) (here, The button image 60AK005 grows to a large size (FIG. 8-10 (C)). The button image 60AK005 grown to a large size is displayed in a dark or translucent state until the operation effective period comes.

  Thereafter, when the fourth timing arrives, the effect of “large button” is started (FIG. 8-10 (D)). In the “large button”, an image “press!” And a large button image 60AK005 imitating the push button 31B are displayed as effect images for promoting the operation. When there is a pressing operation (once operation) on the push button 31B, the attack of the friendly character 60AK003 hits the enemy character 60AK004, and points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 (FIG. 8-10 (B)). In this case, 50 points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 (the meter level is increased). Then, an image “+50 Pt!” Informs that 50 points have been newly accumulated (added). Here, as a result, the point becomes the upper limit value (full tank), and the meter level of the meter image 60AK002 increases by 50 points to become full. Then, by displaying the image of “Meter MAX!”, That is, it is notified that the meter production has been successful, and then the development effect of super reach B is executed, and the meter production is terminated. When the execution pattern is ME02, the point does not reach the upper limit value, and thereafter, the effect of development to super reach A is executed, and the meter effect ends. In addition, when there is no operation and no points are added even once in each operation system effect, since the point has not reached the upper limit value, the special effect for point fullness described above is executed.

(Example screen of meter suggestion production)
In the meter suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 8-11, a suggestion image 60AK011 indicating whether the meter effect is executed is displayed, and the meter effect is displayed while prompting the player's operation (pressing operation to the push button 31B). Suggests initiation (Figures 8-11). In the meter suggestion effect, an image (such as “there is a possibility of starting the meter effect!”) Indicating that the meter effect is started is displayed by an operation on the push button 31B. When there is no operation, the suggestion image 60AK011 is deleted.

(Effect of feature 60AK)
(1) In the feature portion 60AK, the meter image 60AK002 can be changed at the first timing to the fourth timing in the meter effect. The change here is an increase in the meter (FIGS. 8-9, 8-10). Then, as the change pattern, non-operational effects that do not require operation ("automatic addition") and operation-related effects that require operation ("small button continuous hit", "middle button", "large button") The ratio of which one of the operation system effect and the non-operation system effect is executed is varied at each of the first timing to the fourth timing (FIG. 8-6). In this way, by preparing a pattern that does not depend on the player's operation as the change pattern of the meter image 60AK002 and changing the ratio of the change pattern of the meter image 60AK002 at each timing, the meter image 60AK002 The change can be diversified, and the entertainment of the game is improved with respect to the meter image 60AK002.

(2) In addition, as a display that promotes the player's operation, an image of “Shoot continuously!”, An image of “Press!”, A button image 60AK005, and the like are displayed, By changing the mode of the button image 60AK005 for the “middle button” and the “large button”, the presentation can be changed, and the operation by the player is promoted, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, “small button repeated hits” is an addition of 10 points, “middle button” is an addition of 35 points, etc., and “large button” is an addition of 50 points, etc., depending on the mode of the button image 60AK005. Since the degree of change (addition points) of 60AK002 is varied, the production can be put into a mode, and the operation by the player is promoted, and the fun of the game is improved.

(3) In addition, when the meter level of the meter image 60AK002 is changed, an image for notifying an addition point such as “+10 Pt!” And a notification that the meter such as “meter MAX !!!!” is full. By displaying an image or the like, information regarding the meter image 60AK002 can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(5) Also, since the execution ratio of the meter effect is changed according to whether or not the meter suggestion effect is executed, the player pays attention even before the meter effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) As the button image 60AK005, a medium size and a large size button image 60AK005 having a higher hit expectation than the medium size are prepared, the star image 60AK009 is applied to the medium size button image 60AK005, Since it can be changed to a large size, the effect of the change from the medium size to the large size is improved, and the fun of the game is improved.

(7) While preparing a non-operation system effect and an operation system effect, the operation system effect adds 10 points or more, and the non-operation system effect adds 5 points. Since the points (the degree of change in the meter level of the meter image 60AK002 and the points stored in the meter image 60AK002) that are added to the non-operation system effects are different, the non-operation system effects are prepared and the non-operation system effects and the operation system effects are prepared. Since the points to be added are different from each other, the change of the meter image 60AK002 can be diversified, and the entertainment of the game is improved with respect to the meter image 60AK002.

(8) Also, since the operation system effect has a larger point to be added than the non-operation system effect, the player's willingness to operate in the operation system effect can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

(9) Also, in the “automatic addition”, points are gradually accumulated as the battle effect progresses, and the accumulated points are notified with an image of “+5 Pt!”. It can be provided to the player and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as points are gradually accumulated, an image (“+0.1 Pt!” Or the like) for notifying the accumulated points may be continuously displayed, and information about the meter image 60AK002 (point information) is also displayed by this. Can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Configuration with the above characteristic part as an example)
The following is a list of configurations that take the above-described characteristic part as an example. In addition, the matter disclosed above and the following configuration can be omitted regardless of the matter or configuration.

(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A detection means (for example, push button 31B etc.) capable of detecting the player's action;
A specific effect (for example, Super Reach B) when the effect state (for example, meter image 60AK002) has changed to a specific state (for example, a state where the meter is full (FIG. 8-10 (E))) Specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control board 12) for executing
The effect state can be changed toward the specific state at a plurality of timings (for example, a first timing to a fourth timing, etc.) in a predetermined period, and the player's action is detected by the detecting means. A first change pattern (for example, an operation system effect) that changes based on a second change pattern (for example, a non-operation system effect, etc.) that changes without detecting the player's movement by the detection means. Changeable (FIGS. 8-6, 8-9, 8-10, etc.)
Gaming machine.

  The detection means includes an operation means operated by a player. The stick controller 31A may be used as the operation means. For example, in the meter effect, points are added based on the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A. As operation means, a cross key, a plurality of buttons, or the like may be employed. The detection means may be a camera, an infrared sensor or the like for detecting a player's action.

  The effect state may be an image displayed on the image display device 5, light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs whose number of lighting changes according to points. In addition to the meter shape, the performance state may be one light emitting unit or image (for example, hold display, active display, etc.), an image with a lead connected to a bomb, an egg image, an image of a number that is counted down / counted up, etc. May be. The color of one light emitting unit or image changes sequentially until a specific color (specific state). In an image where a lead wire is connected to a bomb, the lead wire is lit and becomes shorter and shorter, and the bomb explodes (specific state). In the image of the egg, the crack is gradually cracked, and when the egg is broken, a predetermined character is born (specific state). In an image of a number that is counted down / up, the number is counted down / up to 0 or 100 (specific state).

  The specific effect may be normal reach or the like in addition to super reach. Further, it may be a notice effect (including a pre-read notice effect) or the like. The specific effect may be an effect informing that the degree of advantage such as the big hit expectation is high. The degree of advantage is a degree (possibility) that is advantageous or already in an advantageous state for the player. In addition to an expectation degree such as a jackpot expectation degree (a possibility that an advantageous state will come from now on), a probability variation state, Advantages in the present, such as a short-time state (whether or not the present is an advantageous state, for example, can be realized by changing the lottery determination ratio between the case where the current state is advantageous and the case where it is not advantageous).

  The operation required for the first change pattern may be a long press or the like. In the above-described embodiment, the second change pattern gradually adds points. However, the second change pattern may be one that adds a predetermined point at a time (changes the effect state to a predetermined state at a time). The determination of whether to change the first change pattern or the second change pattern is preferably made in advance by a lottery or the like before the start of variation and before the start of display of the effect state. In addition, for each of a plurality of timings, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to change the first change pattern or the second change pattern. It is preferable that the first change pattern and the second change pattern can be changed at each of a plurality of timings, but at some timings, only one of the first change pattern and the second change pattern can be used. It may be changeable (for example, at the fourth timing, only the operation system effect can be executed). There may be a pattern that changes the production state with only one change pattern.

  An advantage may be set for each type of operation system effect and non-operation system effect so that an effect with a higher advantage is more likely to be executed after a plurality of timings. For example, when determining the execution pattern of the meter effect in a lump, each execution pattern and the determination ratio are set so that a large button with a high advantage is likely to appear at the fourth timing. In addition, as in the above feature 60AK, it is preferable that an effect of a type to which a higher point is given is more likely to be executed as the timing is after a plurality of timings. By these, since a player's expectation is sustained, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the above feature 60AK, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a symbol is stopped in response to a stop button operation by a player, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big game The feature portion 60AK can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus). What is necessary is just to display the said production | presentation state etc. by the production of a slot machine. In this case, the specific effect or the like is an effect or the like notifying the expected degree of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ or the like.

(2) At least two timings of the plurality of timings, the ratio of whether the presentation state changes between the first change pattern and the second change pattern is different (for example, from the first timing to the first timing) The ratio of which one of the operation system effect and the non-operation system effect is executed is different at each of the four timings (FIG. 8-6, etc.).

  In the characteristic part 60AK, at all timings (first timing to fourth timing) at which the effect state (meter image 60AK002) can be changed, the ratio of whether the first change pattern or the second change pattern changes is set. Although different, the ratios in at least two timings may be different, and the ratios in later timings may be the same. The ratio is also a ratio at which either the operation system effect or the non-operation system effect is executed in the feature unit 60AK. When there are a plurality of types of change ratios in the first change pattern or the second change pattern, the total or average value of the change ratios of the plurality of types may be used. In the above feature 60AK, there is only “automatic addition” as the second change pattern, but a plurality of types of effects may be prepared. For example, you may prepare both what adds a point gradually, and what adds a point at once.

  By preparing a pattern that does not depend on the player's action as the change pattern of the production state and changing the ratio of the change pattern of the production state at two or more timings, diversify the change of the production state And the interest of the game is improved with respect to the production state.

(3) The amount of change in the production state differs between the first change pattern and the second change pattern. Point addition). In addition, the said structure includes the case where there exists a common variation | change_quantity in a part with a said 1st change pattern and a said 2nd change pattern.

  When a plurality of types of first change patterns are prepared (the above-mentioned operation system effects, etc.), the change amount of the effect state may be a change amount of each type, or an average value of the change amounts of each type Etc. The same applies to the second change pattern. A plurality of changeable amounts of change may be prepared for one first change pattern and one second change pattern (such as +50 Pt and 45 Pt of “large button”). In this case, the amount of change in the effect state may be each amount of change, or an average value of each amount of change.

  According to such a configuration, a pattern that does not depend on the player's action is prepared as the change pattern of the production state, and the amount of change in the production state is varied according to the change pattern, so the change in the production state is diversified. And the interest of the game is improved with respect to the production state.

  It is arbitrary which amount of change between the first change pattern and the second change pattern is increased, but the change amount of the effect state is larger in the first change pattern than in the second change pattern (for example, In the operation system effect, there is a point addition of 10 points or more, and in the non-operation system effect, a point addition of 5 points is preferable. Thereby, the player's willingness to operate can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved. Note that the amount of change in the second change pattern may be large in part, not necessarily increased. That is, it is preferable that the first change pattern is more likely to have a larger change amount in the production state than the second change pattern.

(4) When the production state changes in the first change pattern, a promotion production that promotes the player's action (for example, “Smash!” Image, “Press!” Image, button image 60AK005 display (E.g., FIG. 8-9, FIG. 8-10), etc.
The promotion effect execution means is a button image for different promotion effects at different timings of the plurality of timings (for example, “small button continuous hit”, “medium button”, “large button” executed at different timings). The aspect of 60AK005 can be changed.
It should be noted that the amount of change in the effect state is different for each of the different promotion effects (for example, “small button continuous hit” adds 10 points, “middle button” adds 35 points, etc., “large button” 50 points, etc. May be added).

  The promotion effect may be one that prompts the player's action with a lamp or the like in addition to the player's action based on the image. The promotion effect is different as long as it is at least one of the player's actions to be promoted (promoted) are different. For example, although the operation is the same, the production mode may be different (display of the button image 60AK005 when “middle button”, “large button” (one operation)).

  According to such a configuration, the action by the player is promoted by the promotion effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

(5) The effect state may be such that the number of changeable timings varies depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-12).

  For example, when determining the execution pattern of the meter effect, first, the number of executions (number of change timings) of the operation system effect / non-operation system effect executed in the meter effect is determined, and then the execution pattern is determined by lottery ( An execution pattern corresponding to the number of executions is prepared in advance). For example, the number of executions is determined by lottery at the determination ratio shown in FIG. It is better to be more successful if the number of times is large. When the change timing is 3 times, there should be 4 change timings originally, but the meter effect ends halfway (the enemy character 60AK004 wins the effect in the third effect) May be a failure mode). If it ends in the middle, there is no need to develop to super reach (the meter effect can be executed even in the case of normal reach (no development), and the meter effect ends in the case of normal reach (no development)). You may prepare a pattern where the production ends with a small number of times less than the third time.

  According to such a configuration, the player comes to pay attention to the timing of the change of the production state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) Predetermined effects differing depending on the stage after the change or the amount of change when the effect state is changed (for example, an image for notifying an additional point such as “+10 Pt!”, A meter such as “Meter MAX !!!!”, etc. And a predetermined effect executing means (for example, an effect control board 12) for executing an image indicating that the player is full.

  The predetermined effect may be an aspect in which the added points are notified, or may be an effect that is executed in response to the accumulation of the predetermined points in the meter image 60AK002. As an effect executed when a predetermined point is accumulated in the meter image 60AK002, for example, an LED is turned on when a predetermined point (upper limit value, half thereof, 90% point, etc.) is accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 Then, there is a mode for notifying that the points accumulated in the meter image 60AK002 have reached a predetermined point.

  According to such a structure, the information regarding the production state can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(7) Special effect execution means (for example, the effect control board 12) for executing a special effect (for example, a battle effect in which the friend character 60AK003 and the enemy character 60AK004 fight) are further provided.
When the production state changes in the second change pattern, the production state changes according to the progress of the special production (for example, points are gradually accumulated according to the progress of the battle production).
The special effect can notify the amount of change when the effect state changes (for example, an image for notifying an addition point such as “+5 Pt!”).

  The special effect may be an effect in which a predetermined character runs and exceeds an obstacle in addition to a battle between the friendly character 60AK003 and the enemy character 60AK004.

  The effect state may change according to the progress of the special effect when changing in the first change pattern as in the feature part 60AK.

  Even when the effect state changes, an effect image (for example, an effect image is displayed when the attack (punch or kick) of the teammate character 60AK003 hits the enemy character 60AK004) is displayed on the image display device 5. Good (including "automatic addition", including when each point is added gradually). The notification of the amount of change in the effect state (display of an image for notifying the addition point, etc.) may be simultaneous with the effect or after the effect (thus, the player's attention can be gathered). And the fun of gaming is improved.) The change amount notification may be performed for each point addition when the points are gradually added by “automatic addition” or the like (for example, an image of “+0.1 Pt!” Is displayed for each point addition). ).

  According to such a structure, the information regarding the production state can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(8) It further includes special effect execution means (for example, an effect control board 12 or the like) for executing a special effect (for example, a meter suggestion effect or the like) using the detection means before shifting to the predetermined period,
Depending on whether or not the special effect is executed, the ratio of shifting to the predetermined period is different (for example, FIG. 8-5).

  The special effect does not have to suggest execution of a meter effect such as a meter suggestion effect (effect that changes the effect state), for example. The special effect and the effect state may not be directly related.

  According to such a configuration, the player pays attention even before the predetermined period, and the interest of the game is improved.

(9) It further includes specific display means (for example, the effect control board 12) that displays a specific display (for example, the button image 60AK005) corresponding to the detection means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a medium-sized button image 60AK005) and a second specific display (for example, a large-sized button image 60AK005, etc.) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display. )
The specific display is performed by executing an effect that acts on the first specific display (for example, an effect in which a star image 60AK009 acts on a medium-sized button image 60AK005 (FIG. 8-10 (C))). The second specific display can be changed (for example, the button image 60AK005 is changed to a large size by the action of the star image 60AK009).

  The size of the button image 60AK005 may be changed to a medium size by causing the star image 60AK009 to act on the small-size button image 60AK005.

  In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means (for example, a period other than the operation reception period), the action effect is executed after the first specific display is displayed (including the dark display as described above). As a result, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display, and an operation effect (for example, “push!” Image using the second specific display is displayed in the effective period of detection by the detection means. The promotion effect etc. to perform are performed (FIG. 8-10 (C)). Thereby, the expectation before an effective period can be raised.

  There are a plurality of types of action effects, and the rate of change to the second specific display may vary depending on which of the action effects is executed. For example, the type may be determined by a lottery in which a determination ratio is set so as to satisfy the condition. Thereby, the expectation with respect to an effect production can be heightened.

  There are a plurality of types of action effects, and there are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change. It may be different. For example, the type may be determined by a lottery in which a determination ratio is set so as to satisfy the condition. Thereby, the expectation with respect to an effect production can be heightened.

  There are a plurality of types of detection means (for example, push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.), and the specific display after the change (for example, the first specific display and the second specific display are the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.). Operation effects detected by the detection means corresponding to different operating devices (for example, an effect for displaying an image of “Press!” Etc.) In the case of the stick controller 31A, “ Display of “lever retracted” or the like may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it can be noted which specific display corresponds to which operation means.

  When the specific display is displayed during the ineffective period of detection by the detecting means, the specific display executing means displays the specific display in a manner indicating the ineffective period (for example, dark or translucent) Or a predetermined image such as “prohibited” may be superimposed on the specific display).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is ineffective.

  The specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, displays a specific display over a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-variables, displays a specific display over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc.) However, it may be changeable. Expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

  A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect, a countdown effect, an effect drop effect, etc.) for notifying that an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is controlled can be executed. The action effect may be executed by executing. According to the above configuration, a sense of expectation for a specific notice effect can be enhanced.

  Setting means capable of setting the setting state relating to the production to a first state (for example, a state where the auto button function is disabled) or a second state (for example, a state where the auto button function is enabled) (For example, the production control board 12 and the like) and a specific production when the production execution condition is satisfied (for example, addition of points in the “small button continuous hit”, “middle button”, “large button”, notification of the addition points, etc.) Specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control board 12), and the specific effect executing means satisfies the effect execution condition based on the detection result of the detecting means in the first state. On the other hand, the specific effect can be executed, and in the second state, the specific effect can be executed on the assumption that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means. (For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 31B is not operated, the addition of points, the notification of the addition points, etc. are performed), and the setting means is a variable display It may be possible to change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detecting means during the execution of (for example, the setting can be changed by a predetermined operation during the execution of the production). . According to the said structure, it can prevent that an interest falls.

(10) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous for a player,
An alerting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for displaying “pachinko / pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed moderately” in FIG.
The alerting means is:
It is possible to execute alerts regarding prevention of entrapment at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer waiting demo state) and when the advantageous state has ended (for example, an ending effect execution period in a big hit gaming state) (for example, 8-13 etc.)
Different modes (sizes are different) between the non-gaming state (for example, FIG. 8-13 (A) and the like) and the advantageous state is terminated (for example, FIG. 8-13 (B), for example). (Including that the time is different)) (for example, FIG. 8-13, etc.)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a warning regarding prevention of sinking.

The alerting means can display on the display means a reminder display relating to prevention of sinking, which is partly common in the non-game state and when the advantageous state ends, as alerting (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-13, it is possible to display a stagnation-preventing image with the same character content displayed in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period).
The display period of the warning display regarding the prevention of encroachment is shorter when the advantageous state is ended than when the non-game state is reached (for example, the big hit than when the customer waiting demonstration state (FIGS. 8-13 (A))) The ending period after the end (FIG. 8-13 (B)) is shorter than the display period of the anti-slip image, etc.)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the alert display while preventing the interest of the game from being lowered by excessively displaying the alert when the advantageous state is ended.

The alerting means can display on the display means a reminder display regarding prevention of stagnation, which is partly common in the non-game state and when the advantageous state is ended, as the alert. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, it is possible to display a stagnation-preventing image with the same character content displayed in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period).
The display area of the warning display regarding prevention of sinking is smaller when the advantageous state ends than when the non-game state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the big hit ends compared to the case of the customer waiting demo state The display area of the anti-collapse image is smaller during the later ending period)
You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the alert display while preventing the interest of the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the alert when the advantageous state ends.

The alerting means can display on the display means a reminder display regarding prevention of stagnation, which is partly common in the non-game state and when the advantageous state is ended, as the alert. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, it is possible to display a stagnation-preventing image with the same character content displayed in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period).
When the advantageous state is over, the alert display regarding the prevention of sinking is displayed at a position that is not conspicuous to the player when the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. In the ending period after the end of the big hit, the anti-slipping image is displayed in the corner of the screen which is not conspicuous to the player, etc. than in the demo state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the alert display while preventing the interest of the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the alert when the advantageous state ends.

  The attention calling means can display a warning display relating to prevention of sinking as a warning in the same display period as other warning display, and display the warning display at different display start timings (for example, For example, display each alert display at different timings).

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of alert displays are displayed in the same period, it is possible to suppress the player from being able to confirm the information by displaying a plurality of information at a stretch.

  As the alerting means, the alerting means for preventing the sinking can be displayed in the same display period as the other alerting displays, and each alerting display is faded in in order and faded out at a common timing. (For example, the anti-slip image can be displayed in the same period as the other alert display, and after the other alert display is faded in, the anti-slip image is faded in to the other alert display. After all of the images that prevent sinking have come out, fade out at a common timing, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute display control for a good-looking attention display.

(11) A first pattern in which super reach A or B is executed via a meter effect and a second pattern in which super reach A or B is executed without going through a meter effect (for example, directly developed from normal reach) (In this case, whether or not the meter effect is performed is also determined by lottery). In this case, the first reach and the second pattern may have different super reach A or B effects. Further, the super-reach A or B effect may be the same for the first pattern and the second pattern. Further, the expectation (advantage) may be different between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(12) As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the meter effect, the upper limit point of the meter image 60AK002 and the image 60AK101 suggesting the current point (“100 of“ 10/100 ”is the upper limit point, “10” may be displayed). As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the meter effect, an image for notifying the remaining time of the operation reception period (such as a bar-shaped image 60AK102 that decreases with time) may be displayed. As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), at the start timing of each of the first timing to the fourth timing, information (title, operation method, etc.) regarding the operation system effect or non-operation system effect to be executed from now on is notified. The image 60AK103 may be displayed. The image 60AK103 may be displayed in a superimposed manner on the front surface of another image being displayed (such as the meter image 60AK002). As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), when points are accumulated in the meter image 60AK002, the image display device 5 is superposed on other effect images such as the friend character 60AK003 and the enemy character 60AK004, and the points to be added are notified. Effect image 60AK104 to be displayed (for example, an image displayed when an attack (punch or kick) of the teammate character 60AK003 hits the enemy character 60AK004 and points are added) (the meter of the meter image 60AK002 is then displayed). Level increases by 35 points). The effect image 60AK104 is not overlapped with the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereby, the visibility of the decorative design is ensured. Each display of FIGS. 8-14 improves the production effect and improves the fun of the game.

  The display position of the button image 60AK005 (image that promotes the player's operation (action)) displayed in the meter effect may not be fixed. For example, the display position of the button image 60AK005 may be changed between a continuous hit (“small button continuous hit”) and a single operation (“middle button”, “large button”). In this way, the display position of the button image 60AK005 may be changed according to the type of necessary operation (action). Further, the display position of the button image 60AK005 may be changed according to the type of other effects and the aspect of the effect regardless of the type of operation required (for example, the button image 60AK005 is placed at a position that does not interfere with other effects). indicate). The display position of the button image 60AK005 may be changed according to the combination of the type of operation required and the type of other effect or its effect mode. In the case of repeated hits, a large number of button images 60AK005 and the like (for example, the number of required repeated hits) may be displayed (see FIG. 8-15).

  When displaying a specific image (particularly an image with a high expectation level for big hits and promoting an operation) such as a large button image 60AK005 (FIG. 8-10 (D)), the specific image is displayed. A notification effect for notifying that the image is to be displayed (there may be a pattern that does not display a specific image) may be performed (not performed when displaying a small to medium-sized button image 60AK005 or the like). Thereby, the display of a specific image can be excited. Whether the specific image is displayed by sequentially changing the color and size of the button image 60AK005 using the display of the dark or translucent button image 60AK005 (FIG. 8-10 (C), etc.) in the notification effect. You may make it perform the alerting effect which asks whether it is no. For example, the notification effect of changing the color of the translucent button image 60AK005 from blue → yellow → green → red and then changing the translucent button image 60AK005 to the large size button image 60AK005 is executed.

(13) The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game media and adds points based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

(14) Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display is performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Also good. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

(15) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, You may take the form distributed by installing in the memory | storage device which a computer apparatus etc. have. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

(Other)
In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed this time are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the following descriptions, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine, etc.) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state), and can detect the operation of the player Change the detection state (for example, push button 31B) and the production state (for example, meter image 60AK002) to a specific state (for example, the state in which the meter is full (FIG. 8-10 (E)), etc.) Specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control board 12) that executes a specific effect (for example, super reach B) when the performance state is provided, and the effect state has a plurality of timings (for example, first timing) in a predetermined period. 1st change pattern that can be changed toward the specific state at the timing to the fourth timing, etc., and that changes based on detection of the player's action by the detecting means. (For example, an operation system effect) and a second change pattern (for example, a non-operation system effect) that changes regardless of the detection of the player's movement by the detection means (see FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-9, FIG. 8-10, etc.), and at least two timings of the plurality of timings, the effect state changes in either the first change pattern or the second change pattern. (For example, the ratio of whether the operation system effect or the non-operation system effect is executed at each of the first timing to the fourth timing is different (FIG. 8-6), etc.) The variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) that can change between the first state in which the player can win and the second state in which the game medium cannot be won or difficult are different from the advantageous state. In state Yes, special state control means (for example, steps S90358 to S90360 in the game control microcomputer 90560 are executed that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) including the variable winning means changing to the first state. Part) and special state control means (for example, game control micro) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled to a special state as compared to the normal state. Steps S902208A, S90211A, S90212A, S902209B, S90210B, S902213B, and S902214B in the computer 90560) are provided. Launched game media Provided so as not to win a prize (for example, realized by providing a nail group 55 as a delay means for delaying the flow of game balls and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds. The first variable display pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27 of the shortening variation) is used for the variable display that is not triggered by the advantageous state in the special state. And a second variable display pattern in which the variable display period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, second variation patterns # 26 and # 28 including a continuous effect), and in a special state The ratio that is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is the special ratio after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Lower than the rate controlled by the state (for example, in the case of Koatari the proportion of relatively change time is determined in the long second fluctuation pattern # 28 is not low (or determined). (See FIG. 23) A gaming machine is exemplified.

  According to such a configuration, a pattern that does not depend on the player's action is prepared as the change pattern of the production state, and the change pattern in which the production state changes is changed at two or more timings. Changes in the production state can be diversified, and the interest of the game is improved with respect to the production state. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered and to enhance the effect of production.

  Further, the ratio controlled to the special state may be varied depending on the change pattern. For example, the second change pattern may be controlled to a special state at a higher rate than the first change pattern. By doing so, the player can predict that the special state will be controlled when the second change pattern is executed, and the interest will be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it vary the ratio controlled to a special state by the timing which performs a change production. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first half timing during variable display, the special state may be controlled at a higher rate than when the change effect is executed at the second half timing. By doing so, the player can predict that the player will be controlled in a special state according to the execution timing of the change effect, and the interest will be improved.

  Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern in the special state, the possibility that the possibility is high (including the fact that the control is performed in the special state) is variably displayed. You may make it suggest by a change timing and a change pattern during a period. For example, in the example of determining the meter effect execution pattern as shown in FIG. 8-6, a high rate is executed when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, super reach B) and then controlled to the special state. When a meter effect execution pattern is set (including being executed only when controlled to a special state) and the meter effect execution pattern is executed, the possibility of being controlled to a special state is high ( Alternatively, it may be possible to recognize that it has been determined that control is performed in a special state. By doing so, game media launched to the variable winning means after being notified that the special state is controlled cannot be won, but it is highly likely to be controlled in the special state (or controlled to the special state). When it is recognized that it has been confirmed that the game medium thus launched can be won in the variable winning means in a special state, the second variable display pattern Even if it is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed by the player, depending on the player's launch operation, it becomes possible to win the variable winning means, further preventing the fall of interest and producing the effect Can be increased.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the interest and enhance the effect, it is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) Variable winning means (for example, a variable winning ball device 9015 or a special variable winning ball device 9022) that can be changed between a first state in which game media can be won and a second state in which game media cannot be won or difficult, and an advantageous state Are different states, and special state control means (for example, steps S90358 to S90358 in the game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including the variable winning means changing to the first state. And a special state (for example, the KT state (first KT) that is frequently controlled to the special state as compared with the normal state). And a special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S902208A, S90211A, S902212A, S902209B, S90210B, S902213B, and S902214B in the game control microcomputer 90560). The means is provided so that a game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled in a special state cannot be won (for example, a nail group 55 as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball). And the variable variable display that is not triggered by the advantageous state in the special state is realized by setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). First variable display whose period is the first period A second variable display pattern (for example, a second variation including a continuous effect), for example, a turn (for example, a second variation pattern # 25, # 27 of a shortened variation) and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. The pattern # 26, # 28) can be executed, and in the special state, the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. (For example, in the case of a small hit, the ratio determined for the second variation pattern # 28 having a relatively long variation time is low (or not determined) in FIG. 59). (See) Amusement machines. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 901 viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. Also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 for emitting hitting balls are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display portion 909a) for variably displaying an effect decoration pattern (first decoration pattern) and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition that is a second execution condition A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative designs (second decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on (for example, that the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 9014) and deriving and displaying the display result (Hereinafter, referred to as a second variable display portion 909b) and a display area (hereinafter referred to as a background symbol display portion) that allows the player to visually recognize display contents more easily than the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b. 909c .) And there is. Note that easy to visually recognize the display content is, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b is always monochromatic. Or the display color changes. In this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c controls the display of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as background symbol) in the three display areas of left, middle, and right. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect part 9c is provided for two variable display parts (first variable display part 909a and second variable display part 909b). In the background symbol effect part 9c, two variable effect parts are provided. Since an effect corresponding to one of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the display unit is executed, the status of the decorative symbol (for example, whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing symbol variation display for effect on the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. .

  A first special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display device 908b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided on the top of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. The first special symbol display unit 908a and the second special symbol display unit 908b can display a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol. It may be configured to variably display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Some of them may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first special symbol. Different characters may be included.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the number of the first reserved memory (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 9018a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 9018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of reserved storage. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative symbol (for production) during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 908a. In addition, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of decorative symbols as decorative symbols during the special symbol variable display time by the second special symbol display 908b. The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 909a is sometimes referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 909b is sometimes referred to as a second decorative symbol. In addition, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers, and the type of the second decorative design is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. It is also possible to include characters that are different from the characters.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of effective winning balls entered into the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls entered into the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter referred to as symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (the total number of hold storage). As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol hold memory display unit 9018c that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reserved memory display 9018a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c, respectively. Although configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 9018a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b is composed of one display, and the display color varies depending on the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. Or

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 9018c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Or among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as the effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start winning is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are only examples. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a.

  Above the gate 9032, a nail group 55 forming a flow path for a right-handed game ball is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the right-handed game ball meanders left and right. It is designed to flow down. Since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 seconds from the time when the game ball is fired to the second start winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024 described later.

  An operation gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the operating gate 9017 is detected by the operating gate switch 9017a.

  Below the operation gate 9017, a special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 9021 in an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 9022 for forming a special winning port 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second start winning port 9014. As shown in FIG. 9, a special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is disposed on the left side, and a variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. Although details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state and are formed as plate-like bottom surfaces that are formed as the bottom surfaces of the flow paths through which the game balls flow down. By moving the member back and forth in the front-rear direction, an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win in a special winning port 9024 or a second start winning port 9014 positioned below the bottom surface member and the game ball wins It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 has the bottom member moved forward in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. From the closed state, the bottom surface member is moved backward to perform the opening control to open the special winning opening 9024 that is a winning area. The variable winning ball apparatus 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening 9014 that becomes a winning area.

  In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed so as to have the same structure. However, as shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the game area 907 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls onto the variable winning ball device 9015. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second start winning port 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is moved backward to open the special winning opening 9024, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 and falls to the out opening 9026 as it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and the bottom member is not retracted and is in a closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 has a special variable winning. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is provided on the downstream side because the game ball flows toward the ball device 9022. It can be said that it is provided.

  In the special winning opening 9024, a switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 13) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special winning opening 9024 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 which is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 9013a and the second starting winning opening 9013b, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is in the closed state, the game balls cannot pass through (enter) the special winning opening 9024, so that a winning ball cannot be obtained. It becomes disadvantageous for the person.

  Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second start opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 9013 and the second start winning port 9014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operation gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning port 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special winning ball device). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state to be described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 (so-called right operation). Hitting operation). Therefore, in this embodiment, detailed description is omitted. However, when the big hit game or the KT state is being performed, for example, the effect display device 909 displays “right-handed” or the like in the right direction. It is desirable to make a configuration so as to notify that a right-handed operation period is in progress, for example, by performing an arrow display indicating “.”

  Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the normal symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. Further, the normal symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting “○” and “×”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 9014). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Every time variable display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Decorative lamps 9025 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out-port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 907. A top frame lamp 9028a, a left frame lamp 9028b, and a right frame lamp 9028c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 907. Further, a prize ball lamp 9051 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball cut lamp 9052 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 9028c. Is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a hitting operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 907. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 905, a game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) And the first special symbol display unit 908a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the first variable display unit 909a changes the first decorative symbol. Display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c Increase by one.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display unit 908b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second variable display unit 909b. The variable display starts. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved memory (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the combined reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed in the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is released until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls have won the big winning opening. One round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is released until a certain period of time elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the big prize opening or when a certain period of time has elapsed after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, and 16 rounds). Note that a V winning area may be provided at the big winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on the condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened. Note that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state varies depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, there are 2R normal big hits, 2R normal big hits, 6R normal big hits, 6R positive big hits, and 16R positive big hits. If a state is given and a 6R normal jackpot or 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, a six round jackpot gaming state is awarded, and if a 16R probability varying jackpot occurs, a 16 round jackpot gaming state is awarded.

  When it is decided to change the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stoppage of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 908a to a jackpot symbol with probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (there is a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later). It becomes an advantageous state for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and shifts to a probable variation state, not only the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 908a becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), it shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  When it is decided to change the stop symbol at the time of stoppage of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 908b to a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol such as “7”, etc.) Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (there is a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later). It becomes an advantageous state for the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probabilistic symbol and shifts to a probable variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol indicator 908b becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, when the second special symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game proceeds to the small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain time has passed so that a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. Thereby, although it is less than a big hit game state also in a small hit game state, it is set as the open mode which a player can obtain a ball. In this embodiment, the small hit game state is a advantageous game state for the player although the advantage is low compared to the big hit game state (in this example, the number of games that can be obtained is small). The game state does not transition to another game state before and after the game state.

  In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example, , The odd number of 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

  Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely long, and the small hit Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). In the KT state, the second KT state, as will be described later, has a short opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015, and when a small hit occurs, a game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

  The probability variation state is a gaming state that is more likely to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is ten times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to occur than the low probability state. The gaming state is easy to play.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state per ordinary figure is the same as in the normal state, but when the second special symbol changes, Since the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of variations in the fixed time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, when the second special symbol fluctuates, it is configured so that it will be all small hits except in the case of big hits (except for the case of forced deviation described later), so the KT state is smaller than the normal state. It is in a gaming state that tends to become. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Next, the game state transition in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first start winning opening 9013, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, and thereafter, after 100 variations display is finished without occurrence of a big hit, the first KT state is ended and the state is changed to the normal state. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. For example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In this embodiment, the case where the first KT state is ended when the variable display of 100 times is uniformly ended when the low probability / the first KT state is controlled is shown. Absent. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of jackpot types that trigger the low probability / first KT state, and the number of variable displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game is different according to the jackpot type (for example, 20 times Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

  In this embodiment, when the player has moved to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second starting winning opening 9014, and the second special symbol variation display is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and thereafter, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished without occurrence of the big hit, the first KT state is ended and the normal state is changed. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. For example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  However, as will be described later, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation big hit is obtained even though the state is the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, control is performed so as to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later). In other words, it is a case where a right hit is made due to the change display of the second special symbol in spite of being in the normal state, and a 16R probability variation big hit is generated. If it is made possible to obtain the award ball, some players may actively play a right-handed game in a normal state, and the original game performance is impaired. For this reason, even if a right-hand hit in the normal state and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the change display of the second special symbol, a penalty is imposed by making a transition only to the first KT state. Aggressive right-handed games can be suppressed.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

  Further, when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that recalls the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

  In the background symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 909c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Although there are exceptions as will be described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 909c. Displayed (the background symbols are finally stopped in the three display areas). If the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three background symbols with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such background symbols are also referred to as jackpot symbols.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 909c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which variable display ends is stopped and displayed, variable display of the background symbol ends.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) And all or some of the background symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that is a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display unit 909c. The display area in the middle is still being displayed in a variable manner, and all or some of the symbols in the display area are changing and displaying synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the background) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 909c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display unit 909c are referred to as reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) is displayed, or the background (background or color and pattern different from the symbol and the character) of the background symbol display unit 909c is displayed. Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

  Next, FIG. 10 to FIG. 12 are diagrams showing the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. However, the variable winning prize is only slightly smaller than the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a base plate portion 90101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is fixedly supported on the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. A special winning opening 9024 (a second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015) is formed in a substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, and a special winning in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. A slit-like accommodation hole 90102 that is long in the left-right direction is formed at a position above the opening 9024 to accommodate the bottom surface member 9023 on the back side (rear) of the game area 907 when the bottom surface member 9023 moves backward. Has been. In the present embodiment, the special prize opening 9024 is specifically formed on the left side slightly from the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 90101. However, it may be left or right.

  The bottom surface member 9023 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right side flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is inclined downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom surface member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 9023 can be moved back and forth between the forwardly moved state shown in FIG. 11 and the backwardly moved state shown in FIG. 12, and the bottom surface member 9023 is located on the back side (rear side) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) for moving the vehicle forward and backward is disposed.

  Returning to FIGS. 10 to 12, on the front side of the base plate part 90101, a flow path forming base part 90112 protruding forward is formed, and on the upper part of this flow path forming base part 90112, the forward movement is performed. An upstream flow path portion 90113 that is continuous in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 9023 with the upstream region 9023U that is the upper end portion (right end portion) of the bottom surface member 9023 in a state of being formed, A downstream region 9023L, which is a lower side end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 9023, and a downstream flow path portion 90114 that forms a flow path of a game ball together with the bottom surface member 9023 are formed in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 9023. Yes.

  In addition, the upper part of the flow path forming part 90112 is recessed downward from the end on the bottom surface member 9023 side of the upstream flow path part 90113 and the downstream flow path part 90114, and the special winning opening 9024 is left and right and viewed from the front. A guide channel portion 90115 for guiding the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024 is formed so as to surround from below.

  The upstream flow path portion 90113 and the downstream flow path portion 90114 are formed so as to incline to the left so that the game ball can flow downward to the left. In addition, the bottom of the guide channel portion 90115 extends downward toward the special prize opening 9024 and is recessed at a position in front of the special prize opening 9024. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 is provided for guiding the game ball backward toward the special prize opening 9024 side (the back side of the game area 907). ing.

  Furthermore, the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base part 90112 is integrally formed with a covering part 90117 that covers the upstream flow path part 90113, the downstream flow path part 90114, and the guide flow path part 90115 from the front. Has been. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream flow passage portion 90113, the downstream flow passage portion 90114, and the guide flow passage portion 90115 from the front so that the game balls flowing down these flow passage portions jump to the glass door frame 904 side. It has a function to prevent it. In this embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but may be fixed separately.

  In the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, a flow of game balls that are connected in the left-right direction, including the upstream channel portion 90113, the bottom surface member 9023, and the downstream channel portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. A path F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces 90118 that reduce the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

  In the present embodiment, the restriction piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding backward from the covering portion 90117. In the case where there is no restriction piece 90118 by changing the flow direction of the game ball so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-rear direction component by interfering with Than delay. These regulating pieces 90118 are formed so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 9023, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. Yes. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one restriction piece 90118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream-side passage portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream-side passage portion of the covering portion 90117. One regulating piece 90118 is formed at a portion covering 90114 from the front. In addition, a total of five regulating pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed in the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023. The number of such restriction pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, most of the restriction piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

  With the arrangement of the restriction pieces 90118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 11, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 (and the similarly configured variable winning ball apparatus 9015) of this embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P flows down so as to meander on the flow path F. When the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P becomes the special winning port 9024 (or the second start winning port 9014). Without passing the prize, it passes basically through the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 (or variable winning ball apparatus 9015). On the other hand, referring to FIG. 12, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P is guided to the flow path forming table 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a special winning opening 9024 (or the second start winning opening 9014).

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. FIG. 13 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 9056 and the RAM 9055, and the ROM 9054 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  Further, detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. An input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 and controls a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020, a solenoid 90106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9022, and a solenoid 90206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015. A system for resetting the game control microcomputer 90560 when the power is turned on is also mounted on the main board 9031. A set circuit (not shown) and an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer are also mounted on the main board 9031. ing. Note that the main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The display control is performed on the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbols, the background symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the background symbols, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 9035 and the sound output board 9070, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 9080 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including an effect control CPU 90201 and RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and receives a capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (no signal is passed in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077) as signal direction regulating means. The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 14 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 that is a unidirectional circuit, a signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the game control microcomputer 90560 side). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input / output port 90205. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 204.

  In the lamp driver substrate 9035, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 through the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

  In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the voice or sound effect to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The audio data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including a decorative design and a background design). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP 90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90209 that performs display control of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90209 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 90200, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

  In this embodiment, an effect control board 9080, an audio output board 9070, and a lamp driver board 9035 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 is mounted, and a second circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board | substrate. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but other boards (for example, the audio output board 9070 and the lamp shown in FIG. 14). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 in the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 for controlling the effect display device 909 as it is or as a simplified command, for example. May be. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). Then, initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S904). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is the interrupt address. Is the mode shown.

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. Control is performed so that a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery is transmitted (step S9094). Then, control goes to a step S9015.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). Note that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, an out of ball flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag for this.

  The CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S9014). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

  In step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Setting is performed (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination is one round (a random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S9021).

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b. It executes (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 ': Decide whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2 ': Determines the type of jackpot, ie, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining jackpot type)
(3) Random 5 ': Determines the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6 ': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7 ′: Determine the initial value of random 1 ′ (for determining the random 1 ′ initial value)
(6) Random 8 ′: Determine an initial value of random 6 ′ (for determining random 6 ′ initial value)

  In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 16, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (4) a normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) are also used. In this embodiment, a common random number (random 2 ′) is provided as a random number for determining the type of jackpot and a random number for determining the type of jackpot. However, different random numbers are provided. There may be.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process, the second special symbol display unit 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are controlled according to a second special symbol process flag for controlling the game in a predetermined order. Perform the appropriate processing. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol process processing (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a hold storage process (step S9027a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process for calculating and managing the total number (total pending stored number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, for example, when the detection signal from the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a is input, the CPU 9056 issues a payout control command for designating one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. For example, when the CPU 9056 receives a detection signal from the first count switch 9023a or the second count switch 9025a, the CPU 9056 outputs a payout control command for designating 15 prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. To do.

  In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a special winning opening 9024 and is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a display of a winning ball increase display and a winning effect, which will be described later, are not immediately executed but executed in a delayed manner. As for the payout of prize balls, in the prize ball processing in step S9030, when a detection signal is input from the second count switch 9025a, the payout control for designating 15 prize balls immediately. The command is output, and the ball payout device 9097 is driven by the payout control microcomputer to immediately pay out 15 prize balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 uses the contents related to the solenoid on / off in the RAM area of the output port as the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. In addition, special symbol display for setting second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag is set in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapses. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b. Execute.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapses. Further, the CPU 9056 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. It may be executed in step (b).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 908a and the second special symbol display unit 908b perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the CPU 9056 Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in the two displays.

  FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a non-probable change big hit determination table used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability). Probability / second KT state)) is used in the probability change jackpot determination table. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 18 (A) is set in the non-probable change jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 18 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 18A is a jackpot determination value.

  FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value described in FIG. 18B is set in the small hit determination table. Moreover, the numerical value described in FIG. 18B is a small hit determination value.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S90162B) may be performed only when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the small hit may be made, and has already been described. As described above, since the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, the frequency at which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit gaming state is higher than the big hit gaming state.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to win a jackpot for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches any one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 18B, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 18A indicates the probability (ratio) of winning a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIG. 18B indicates the probability (ratio) of being a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, the probability (ratio) of small hits is set to be 122/487, and is set to be about 1/4. Yes. In addition, determining whether or not to win the jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. In addition, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b a small hit symbol? It also means deciding whether or not.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, all are unconditionally set off. In addition, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined to be a small hit by probability (however, as will be described later, it may be out of force).

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a determines that the jackpot type is “2R normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “2R probability variable big hit”, “6R normal big hit”, “6R probability variable big hit”, or “16R probability variable big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 20%, and “ "6R probability variable big hit" is determined, and "6R normal big hit" is determined with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30% The “6R probability variation big hit” is determined, the “2R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 5%, and the “2R normal big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%.

  The “16R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 16-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the probability changed state is changed. At the same time, the state is shifted to the second KT state (refer to steps S902207A, S902208A, S902207B, and S90210B described later). The probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

  However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the big hit start, even if it becomes “16R probability variable big hit”, it is not in the second KT state. There is a case where the state shifts to the first KT state (see steps S902208B and S902209B described later).

  The “6R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the jackpot is shifted to a probability varying state). At the same time, the process proceeds to the first KT state (see steps S90210A, S90211A, S902212B, and S902213B described later). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

  The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to only the first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (see step S902212A described later). Then, after the transition to the first KT state, the first KT state ends when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) (see steps S902213A and S902010 to S902013). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the positive changed state is entered. At the same time, the state is shifted to the first KT state (see steps S902212B and S902213B described later). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

  The “2R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to only the first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (see step S902214B described later). Then, after the transition to the first KT state, the first KT state ends when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) (see steps S902215B and S902010 to S902013). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S902015).

  Note that the types of jackpot types are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be configured to be able to determine 3R probability variation big hit to 7R probability variation big hit other than 16R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, and 2R normal big hit, and various modes are considered. It is done.

  20-22 is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used in this embodiment, and a decoration symbol. EXT shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 29 types of # 01 to # 29 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 29) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

  When the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 20A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 20B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

  When executing the second special symbol variation display, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 21C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of place, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of time of 5 minutes.

  In this embodiment, even when in the non-KT state, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, there is a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls at the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is lowered. By doing so, the occurrence frequency of the small hits is lowered, and the situation where the winning of the winning balls by the small hits is aimed at despite the non-KT state is prevented.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball by winning a special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 21 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 21D, when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is a deviation, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortening fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined. The Further, when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Variation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as already described, in the case of being controlled to the first KT state, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 although the frequency of small hits is increased. The special prize opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special prize opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 before the transition to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball device 9022 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the first KT state.

  Further, in the case where the change display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 99th variation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21E, when the second special symbol variation display is executed as the second to 99th variation in the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 07 to # 11 To be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 21E, when it is determined that the 2nd to 99th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is out of place, the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortening fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. May be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the 2nd to 99th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 09 having a short fluctuation of 5 seconds. In this embodiment, the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are determined to be off or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In the case where the effect display device 909 displays the variation of the background symbol, the effect of the design change is executed, such as the reach effect or the slip effect.

  In addition, after displaying the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 100th change (that is, low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 21F is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 21F, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Is done.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the effect display device 909 displays a character display such as “During Chance Time”. As shown in FIG. 21F, when it is determined that the 100th change in the low probability / first KT state is a loss or a small hit, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as “Chance Time End!”. The second variation pattern # 12 and the second variation pattern # 13 with the end display are determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 21F, when the big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays the characters such as “End of Chance Time !!” After the display, the second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the first special symbol variation display is a big hit during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 is determined for one minute variation time. It is configured as follows. This is a case in which a big hit is immediately generated by the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You will not receive any profits from small hits. For this reason, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) that at least a small hit can occur is secured.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 22 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Is done.

  Similar to the first change in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 22 (G), even when the first change in the high probability / first KT state is determined to be out of place, the change time is 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 15 having a short shortening variation may be determined. In addition, even when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing for opening the second start winning a prize opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22 (G), in the case of determining a big hit as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. A second variation pattern # 19 including an effect is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (G), the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is also determined when the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is determined to be off or small hit. 18 may be determined.

  Also, in the case of executing the change display after the second change after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability to be shown / first KT and for the second and subsequent variations is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 22 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation or higher of the high probability / first KT state, it is set to one of the second variation patterns # 20 to # 24. It is determined.

  Similar to the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 22 (H), even when it is determined that there is a deviation from the 2nd fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time May be determined to be the second variation pattern # 20 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds. In addition, even when it is determined that a small hit is made after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the change time may be determined to be the second change pattern # 22 having a short change of 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (H), in the case of determining a big hit as the second and subsequent changes in the high probability / first KT state, it is suggested to indicate whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. A second variation pattern # 24 including a battle effect is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (H), the second variation pattern # 21 or the second variation pattern including a battle effect is also obtained when it is determined that the second variation or higher in the high probability / first KT state is lost or a small hit. # 23 may be determined.

  In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 22 (I) is selected. Variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 22 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 29.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), when it is determined that there is a loss in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation of the shortening variation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). In some cases, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation having a variation time shorter than 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed is determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the variation display of the shortening variation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 27 with a shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), when it is determined that there is a loss in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether the high probability / second KT state continues. In some cases, # 26 is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), in the case of determining the small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuous effect suggesting whether the high probability / second KT state continues. The pattern # 28 may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 22 (I), in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends after the continuous performance. A second variation pattern # 29 including an effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect or the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuation effect or the battle effect in the background symbol variation display. In the case of a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the effect of the victory mode is executed in the battle effect, and in the case of a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) When a defeat-type effect is executed and a small hit is made, a draw-type effect is executed in the battle effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and, for example, a defeat mode effect may be executed in the battle effect even when the number of rounds in the big hit game is 2R probability variable big hit. .

  In addition, when determining the variation pattern of the shortened variation of the second variation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it varies depending on the number of reserved storage. You may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern of a shortening fluctuation | variation may be determined by a ratio. For example, the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined at a higher rate as the number of reserved memories increases, so that the reserved memory can be quickly consumed and the operating rate can be increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the configuration is such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the first KT state and a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a short variation of 5 seconds may be executed in the low probability state, and a shorter short variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

  Next, a specific example of the variation pattern determination ratio will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the second special symbol variation pattern table [high probability / in the second KT] shown in FIG. In the second special symbol variation pattern table [high probability / second KT] shown in FIG. 22 (I), a judgment value is assigned for each variation pattern. In the example shown in FIG. The ratio of determination values (that is, the determination ratio for each variation pattern) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is a high probability / displacement in the second KT state, the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortening variation is determined at a rate of 70%, and the rate of 30% The second variation pattern # 26 including the continuation effect is determined. Also, in the case of determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 of the shortening variation is determined at a rate of 95%, and the second variation pattern # including the continuous effect at a rate of 5%. 28 is determined. Further, in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 29 is determined at a rate of 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol whose display result is not a big hit is displayed as the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27) and a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, second variation patterns # 26 and # 28).

  In the KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed, it is conceivable that the player stops the firing operation during that time. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds. However, since the nail group 55 is provided, a game ball is launched. To at least 1.0 second from the first to the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. In other words, even if a game ball is fired after a small hit has occurred (specifically, after a small hit symbol has been derived and displayed, or after the occurrence of a small hit has been announced), the special winning opening 9024 is won. It is configured not to be allowed. Then, even if a small hit occurs after the display of the variation of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time, the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won, and the effect cannot be enhanced. There is a risk of letting you.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, in the KT state (here, the second KT state), the variation display is performed by the variation pattern (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28) having a relatively long variation time. The ratio at which the small hit occurs after the execution of the “S” is lower than the ratio at which the small hit occurs after the fluctuation display is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the shortening variation (that is, the second variation patterns # 25 and # 27). A judgment value is assigned to. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a special winning opening 9024 cannot be won even if a small win occurs and the interest is lowered, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, when the small probability is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 is determined to have a relatively long variation time at a rate of 5%. However, it may not be determined. That is, the second variation pattern # 28 is not provided, or a determination value is not assigned to the second variation pattern # 28, and the variation occurs in a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time in the KT state (second KT state here). The small hit may not be generated even after the display is executed.

  In this embodiment, the second variation pattern # 26, # including the continuous effect is provided as a variation pattern having a longer variation time than the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). 28 is provided, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an effect other than the continuous effect (for example, when the display result is out of place, small hit, and big hit is common) A variation pattern including a reach effect to be executed) may be provided.

  For example, a variation pattern having a long variation time compared to a shortened variation, a variation pattern that is lost after a predetermined reach effect is executed, and a change pattern that is a small hit after a predetermined reach effect is executed, You may make it provide the fluctuation pattern used as a big hit after a predetermined reach production is performed. Also in this case, the rate at which the small hit occurs after the fluctuation display is executed by the fluctuation pattern in which the predetermined reach effect is executed is based on the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation (that is, the second fluctuation patterns # 25 and # 27). It is desirable that the determination value is assigned so as to be lower than the rate at which the small hit occurs after the variable display is executed. Further, when the big hit is not made after the predetermined reach effect is executed, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit is higher than the small hit.

  In addition, when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, any one of three or more variation patterns having different variation times can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern with the short variation time in order is increased. May be. For example, a variation pattern including a first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) and a variation pattern including a second reach effect (variation time 20) when the display result is out of place, small hit, and big hit, respectively. Second) and a variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds), and when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, a variation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds) > The variation ratio including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds) may be increased in this order. Moreover, the display is performed in the order of the variation pattern including the third reach effect (variation time 30 seconds)> the variation pattern including the second reach effect (variation time 20 seconds)> the variation pattern including the first reach effect (variation time 10 seconds). When the result does not become a big hit, the ratio of being out of the big hit may be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a special winning opening 9024 cannot be won even if a small win occurs and the interest is lowered, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the ratio of occurrence of small hits is low (or does not occur) after the fluctuation display is executed with the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time. Even in the first KT state, the ratio of occurrence of small hits may be low (or will not occur) after the fluctuation display is executed with the fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball, and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game is set to 0.8 seconds. Even if a game ball is fired after a win has occurred (specifically, after a small hit symbol has been derived and displayed or after the occurrence of a small hit has been announced), the special winning opening 9024 cannot be won. However, it may be realized by only one of the configurations, or even if the nail group 55 is not provided, the special prize opening 9024 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, before the game ball reaches) You may implement | achieve by arrange | positioning in the position which takes more than 1.0 second) longer than an open period.

  Further, when the player is in the KT state, a right-handed notification (for example, “right-handed” character display on the effect display device 909 or the like) In the case of configuring to display an arrow indicating the right direction, etc., when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortening variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27), The right-handed notification may be executed in a different manner depending on the change display being executed by the change pattern having a relatively long change time (that is, the second change pattern # 26, # 28). For example, in the KT state, when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern having a relatively long variation time (that is, the second variation pattern # 26, # 28), the ratio of occurrence of the small hit is low, and the right-handed operation is performed. Since it is less disadvantageous to the player even if it stops, it is more “right-handed” than when the variation display is executed by the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). The character display or the arrow display indicating the right direction may be reduced or made transparent so as not to actively promote right-handedness. By comprising in this way, suitable right-handed alerting | reporting according to a condition can be performed.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Among these, FIG. 24 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 24 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable ball device 9015 in the second KT state. An opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is shown.

  First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Is determined to be displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 9010 when it is determined to be off. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second startup winning port opening processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. Then, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 24A, the open time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short. Opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 24 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened for the next normal symbol variation time. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is a total of 0.2 seconds, a symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and a second start winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is opened.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the normal symbol is displayed. Is determined to be displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 9010 when it is determined to be off. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning port opening processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning hole 9024. It becomes.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as extremely short as 0.5 seconds. In this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 24 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015 is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022, and it is easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 9024. For example, in this embodiment, although the winning frequency of gaming balls is lower than that in the big hit gaming state, a maximum of 10 gaming balls can be won per round, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is being played. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

  In this embodiment, the “winning frequency” indicates, for example, a winning ratio of game balls to the big winning opening or special winning opening 9024 with respect to the number of game balls launched in the game area 907.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol process processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015. This is performed by executing (see step S9026C). The game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process for determining whether or not to hit the normal figure in the normal symbol process in step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) To determine whether or not to hit the ordinary map. Specifically, regardless of whether the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a big hit gaming state , It is determined whether or not to be per common map with the same probability.

  In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening releasing process is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods) by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning port opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning port opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be varied. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning in the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

  Further, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. The ball device 9015 is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time. If the special flag is not set, a variable opening ball device 9015 shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may control by short open. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and control may be performed so that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit gaming state.

  Even in the first KT state, when the last variation display during the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th special symbol fluctuation stop in the 100th special symbol shortened fluctuation period in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, when a left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 9015 being long open. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 9015, a flag for shortening variation of the special symbol variation display is further used. The special symbol variation display may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

  In addition, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is configured to have a high probability of opening in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible to prevent winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 9015, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this embodiment, since the nail group 55 is provided, it takes at least 1.0 seconds from the game ball being fired to the second start winning opening 9014 and the special winning opening 9024 described later. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the ordinary symbol is not retained. This is because the device 9015 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the timing of the second special symbol variation stop timing (when the small symbol hits, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 9032 Until the game ball that has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, the variable winning ball device 9015 is not released, and the special winning opening 9024 can be won). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the nail group 55 is provided and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened so that the game ball can be changed before it reaches the variable winning ball device 9015 after passing through the gate 9032. Since the opening of the winning ball device 9015 is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  In this embodiment, a nail group 55 is provided in order to eliminate a capture element due to the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, and the variation of the normal symbol Although the time is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds, the capture element may be excluded by only one of the configurations. Further, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the strategy elements may be excluded by the positions, shapes, and opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning opening 9024. For example, the special prize opening 9024 is such that the period until the game ball launched after the small hit has reached the variable prize ball device 9015 or the special prize opening 9024 is longer than the opening period of the special prize opening 9024 due to the small hit. The position, shape, and opening pattern may be determined.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 802C (H) correspond to the first variable display portion 909a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the special symbol variable display. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b is received. Control is performed so as to start variable display of decorative symbols.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation specified by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first variation pattern command is transmitted. Since the command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second decorative symbol, Although the display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol may be different from the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol.

  Also, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not transmit a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal variation big hit / 2R positive variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / loss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing stop of variable display of the first symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second ornament symbol stop designation command)) instructing stop of variable display of the second symbol.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results.

  In this embodiment, in the winning determination process described later (see FIG. 28), the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, a small win or not, Determine. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designating command, whether or not the display result is a jackpot or jackpot.

  In this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit. For example, in the winning determination process described later, when it is determined that the game is “out of”, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “16R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “6R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, if it is determined that the “6R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “small hit” is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 7 designation command) in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  In addition to the configuration of this embodiment, in the winning determination process, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for variation pattern determination falls, and the determination result (variation pattern determination result) is displayed. A command may be transmitted. With this configuration, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize the variation pattern.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

  The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b and the display state of the background symbol display portion 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the sound output board 9070. It should be noted that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 are also transmitted from main board 9031 to effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the big hit game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

  When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process, the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 9013 provided in the game board 906 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 9013 has occurred (step S90311), the first start opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). Thereafter, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

  The processes in steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.

  First special symbol normal process (step S90300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. The internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  First special symbol changing process (step S90303): This processing is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process has elapsed (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 90200 has Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decoration symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  First special symbol stop process (step S90304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90304A. If the first big hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control processing (step S9036) based on the special symbol process flag value of 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S9022.

  First gate passage waiting process (step S90304A): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass to the operation gate 9017. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example).

  First big winning opening opening pre-process (step S90305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the first grand prize opening, control for opening the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  First big prize opening opening process (step S90306): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 9023a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

  First big hit end processing (step S90307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 90200 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S90312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S90212). If the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S90213) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S90214). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 29) (step S90215). . In the process of step S90215, the big hit determination random number (random 1 ′), the big hit type determination random number (random 2 ′), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5 ′), which are software random numbers, are extracted and stored in the storage area. Stored. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 5 ′) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 5 ′) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. It may be.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 29, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′), a jackpot type determination random number (random 2 ′), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 5 ′). ) Is stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning determination process (step S90216), and performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step S90217). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later, the big hit type is determined. By executing the winning determination process at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 and before the variation display based on the start winning is started, Check whether it is a big hit or not, and the type of big hit. By doing so, it is possible to predict the display result before the effect symbol variation display is executed, and to execute the pre-reading notice effect by the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. .

  In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 18A and determines whether or not they match. Confirm. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. To see if they match. It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S90216 at the time of starting winning, until actually starting the displaying of variation based on the starting winning. There is. Therefore, the game state has changed before the start of the fluctuation display based on the start winning prize (for example, if the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs before the start of the change, the normal change state from the normal state) In some cases). Therefore, the gaming state at the time of starting winning and the gaming state at the start of variation do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S90216).

  In this embodiment, when the process of steps S90216 to S90218 is executed, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 occurs and the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designation command and the first valid command A set of two commands of the start winning designation command is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90300 means that the first special symbol indicator 908a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where the first big hit game is not in progress (the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times).

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step S9050A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the first reserved memory number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 checks whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the variable display (step S9051A). Note that whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last time the variable display is finished is, for example, that the timer for measuring the period during which the variable display is not executed when the variable display is ended is set to 30 seconds. This can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the variable display, the game control microcomputer 90560 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052A).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. Are stored in the first random number buffer area (step S9053A), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 9055 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are: The order of extraction is also stored in an identifiable manner.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, the low probability / non-KT state is determined and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off. When the 1KT flag is on, the low probability / first KT state is determined and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variable flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the high probability / second It is determined that the state is the 1KT state, and the high-accuracy / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variation flag is on and the second KT flag is on, the high-probability / second KT state is determined and the high-accuracy / second KT state Send a background specification command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the big special symbol fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed (step S9063A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big special hit of the second special symbol is being changed. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S9068A without performing the processing after step S9064A. Thereby, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step S9063A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) as a big hit determination random number (random 1 ′) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065A. The jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

  In addition to the big hit determination, in a gaming machine that performs a small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit, if the second special symbol is changing big hit in step S9063A, steps S9064A to S90161A. The random number value (fixed value) is set as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or may be a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, the big hit determination random number (random 1 ′) may be forcibly disregarded at the time of starting winning a prize.

  If the second special symbol jackpot change is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) from the first random number storage buffer (step S9064A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S9064A). Step S9065A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9066A), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step S9067A). . Based on the random 2 ′, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, or 6R normal big hit (step S90160A), the big hit type is stored (step S90161A), and the process proceeds to step S9068A. To do. Further, when the big hit is not made in step S9066A (that is, when it is a loss), the process proceeds to step S9068A.

  In this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, the case where it is unconditionally determined to be all off is shown. I can't. For example, even when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be determined to be a big hit with a low probability.

  In step S9068A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S9068A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S9068A.

  In step S9065A, the game state is taken into consideration to determine whether or not to make a big hit using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S90302) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 20A to 20B according to the game state. (Step S90201). Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the variation pattern table decided to be used in step S90201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5 ′) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 20 is to be used (step S901700). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 90560 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901701).

  When the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S901700, the game control microcomputer 90560 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first special symbol process timer and varies. Time measurement is started (step S901702), a measurement execution flag to be described later is set, and first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 908a is started (step S901703). Then, the game control microcomputer 90560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S901706).

  In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S90302), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056), based on the determination result of whether or not to win, and the determination result of the jackpot type, Any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90200.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 9056 first subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S90121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S901122A), the symbol is confirmed in the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control to transmit the designated command is performed (step S901123A). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

  If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (step S901125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the CPU 9056 shifts to step S901123A and performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S901123A). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901124A).

  By executing the processing of step S901125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. Therefore, a situation where a big hit occurs simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is prevented. In this case, on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90200, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly discontinued, the first variable display unit 909a has the first variable display portion 909a based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. In addition to stopping the stop display of one decorative symbol, control is performed to forcibly stop and display the symbol as a variation display result of the first decorative symbol based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S90302.

  In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 27 and the second special symbol process shown in FIG. 36, the first start port switch passing process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S90312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S90322) is executed, and if a new start winning is generated even if the big special symbol stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed. It is configured to store new pending storage.

  If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b (N in step S901125A), the processing is ended as it is.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the KT number counter indicating the low probability / the remaining number of times of the first KT state is “0” (step S902010). If there is, that is, if the low probability / the first KT state is not reached, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 9056 subtracts “1” from the value of the KT number counter (step S902011). Is determined (step S902012). When the value of the KT number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step S902014. When the value of the KT number counter becomes “0”, that is, when the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state is ended, the CPU 9056 resets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state ( Step S902013) and the process proceeds to Step S902014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

  In step S902014, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S902014). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT number counter (step S902015).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a timer before opening the big prize opening (step S902017), sets round 1 release pattern data corresponding to the big hit type (step S902018), and sets “1” in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds for the big win. Is set (step S902019), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S902020).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S90304A) in the special symbol process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input (step S902501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is not input, the process is terminated as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 9017a is input, the CPU 9056 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step S902502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing. The corresponding value is set (step S902503).

  In this embodiment, when the first gate passage waiting process is executed, when the big win symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the operation gate 9017. The game ball is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball has passed through and is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S902200A). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S902204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S902201A), and the first big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S902202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S902203A), and the processing is ended.

  In step S902204A, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S902204A). Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205A). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205A), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit type ended this time is a 16R probability variation big hit (step S902206A). It can be determined whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit is, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal process. If it is the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207A), and the second KT flag indicating the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S902208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

  If it is not 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has been finished this time is 6R probability variation big hit (step S902209A). Whether or not it is 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S90161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S90210A) and sets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state and the first KT state. (Step S90211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

  If it is not the 6R probability variable big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902212A). Further, the CPU 9056 sets “100” to the KT number counter indicating the low probability / the remaining number of times of the first KT state (step S902213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S902214A.

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S902214A).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

  When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process, the second start port switch 9014a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 9014 provided in the game board 906 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred (step S90321), the second start opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). It should be noted that the second start port switch passing process will be described by replacing “first” in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 28 with “second”. Thereafter, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

  The processes in steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.

  Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. In addition, when the big hit is not made, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is made the small hit. If it is a small hit, the small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). Note that the second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

  Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90352.

  Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90353.

  Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 has Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decoration symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (11 in this example) corresponding to step S90354A. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90358. If neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (if it is out of place (including cases where it is out of force), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S90350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing in step S9022 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Second gate passage waiting process (step S90354A): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 9017 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 9017 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example).

  Pre-opening process for second big prize opening (step S90355): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second big prize opening opening pre-process, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the second big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Second big winning opening opening process (step S90356): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 9023a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

  Second big hit end process (step S90357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 90200 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Second small hit release pre-processing (step S90358): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special prize opening 9024) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven so that the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened. Also, the execution time of the second small hit release process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90359. The pre-opening process for the second small hit is also a process for starting the small hit game.

  Second small hit releasing process (step S90359): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming that the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 of 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 24) elapses. In addition, when a game ball wins a special winning opening and the second count switch 9025a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90360 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Second small hit end processing (step S90360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 90200 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90350.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S90350 is a state in which the second special symbol indicator 908b does not display the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened).

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) first confirms the value of the second reserved memory number (step S9050B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the first reserved memory number is 0, the game control CPU 90560 checks whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the variable display (step S9051B). Note that whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last time the variable display is finished is, for example, that the timer for measuring the period during which the variable display is not executed when the variable display is ended is set to 30 seconds. This can be determined by setting a corresponding value and checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the variable display, the game control microcomputer 90560 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9052B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 9055, and the RAM 9055. In the second random number buffer area (step S9053B), the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S9054B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 9055 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200 (step S9060B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S9060A of the first special symbol normal process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step S9063B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S9068B without performing the processing after step S9064B. Thereby, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit variation of the first special symbol is in step S9063B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) as a big hit determination random number (random 1 ′) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S9065B. The jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

  In addition to the big hit determination, in a gaming machine that performs a small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit, if the first special symbol is changing big hit in step S9063B, steps S9064B to S90161B. The random number value (fixed value) is set as a small hit determination random number (may be the same random number as the big hit determination random number or may be a completely different random number) By performing the small hit determination, the big hit determination random number (random 1 ′) may be forcibly disregarded at the time of starting winning a prize.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 90560 reads the big hit judgment random number (random 1 ′) from the second random number storage buffer (step S9064B), and executes the big hit judgment module (step S9064B). Step S9065B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9066B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (step S9067B). . Then, based on random 2 ′, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step S90160B), and the big hit type is stored (step S90161B). The process proceeds to step S9068B.

  If the big hit is not made in step S9066B, the game control microcomputer 90560 executes the small hit determination module (step S90162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is determined when a big hit determination random number (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. If it is determined to be a small hit (step S90163B), the game control microcomputer 90560 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S90164B). ). Then, control goes to a step S9068B.

  In step S9068B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S9068B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S9068B.

  In step S9065B, the game state is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not a big hit is made using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

  The second variation pattern setting process (step S90351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S90301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 31, if “first” is read as “second”, the second variation pattern process is explained.

  In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352), the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a big hit, and a big win. Based on the type determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Control to send.

  The second special symbol changing process (step S90353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S90303) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 32, if “first” is read as “second”, the second special symbol changing process is explained.

  In the second special symbol stop process (step S90354), processing similar to the first special symbol stop process (step S90304) shown in FIG. 33 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 33, if “first” is read as “second”, the second special symbol stop process is almost explained. However, in the second special symbol stop process, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit pre-release process (step S90358). .

  The second gate passage wait process (step S90354A) is the same as the first gate passage wait process (step S90304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 34, if “first” is read as “second”, the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S90357) in the special symbol process. In the second jackpot end process, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S902200B). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S902204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S902201B), and the second big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S902202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S902203B), and the processing is ended.

  In step S902204B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S902204B). Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S902205B). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S902205B), the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the type of big hit ended this time is a 16R probability variation big hit (step S902206B). It can be determined whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit is, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902207B). Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not it has been controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the current big hit (step S902208B). Whether the first KT state or the second KT state was controlled before starting the big hit is, for example, in the second special symbol stop process before the big hit game is started, in the first KT state before the big hit is started. The first KT storage flag indicating that the second KT state has been set and the second KT storage flag indicating that the second KT state has been set are set. In step S902208B, it is determined whether or not the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set. Check it. If neither the first KT state nor the second KT state is set before the big hit, the first KT flag is set and the state shifts to the first KT state (step S902209B). If it is in the first KT state or the second KT state before the big hit starts, the second KT flag is set and the state shifts to the second KT state (step S90210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S902208B to S902210B is executed, in the case of 16R probability variation big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the KT state before the big hit starts. Only when the state shifts to the second KT state and is in the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the state shifts to the first KT state. That is, as already described, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is performed, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed. It is configured assuming that. However, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it has been configured to unconditionally shift to the second KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, and there is a possibility that the original gaming property is impaired and gambling is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the big hit, Such a situation is prevented, and in the non-KT state, the player is prompted to perform a left-handed operation.

  If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the type of big hit that has been completed this time is the 6R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit (step S90211B). Whether 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step S90161B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S902212B), and sets the first KT flag to transition to the first KT state (step S90212B). Step S902213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

  If neither the 6R-probable big hit or the 2R-probable big hit is present (that is, if it is a 2R normal big hit), the CPU 9056 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S902214B). Further, the CPU 9056 sets “100” in the KT number counter (step S902215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S902216B.

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S90350) (step S902216B).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like (step S90701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90201 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. . Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. . Also, background symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). In addition, a winning ball number display process for controlling the display of the winning ball number display indicating the number of winning balls acquired during the big hit game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) is executed (step S90707). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90708). In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a notice determination random number is executed (step S90709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S90702.

  40 to 42 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90201 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 has the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) formed in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S90618A).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received.

  If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S90622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S90624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step S90626).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

  If the received effect control command is low-accuracy / non-KT background designation (step S90630), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, , A blue display color background screen) (step S90631). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step S90632). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets a prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game or the KT state (the first KT state or the second KT state) (step S90633) and the effect display. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 909, control for deleting the prize ball number display is performed (step S90634).

  If the received effect control command is the low probability / first KT background designation (step S90635), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the low probability / first KT state (for example, , A green display color background screen) (step S90636). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the first KT state flag (step S90637). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state (step S90638). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to display the award ball number display by the first KT pattern in the effect display device 909 (step S90639). For example, a prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display by any pattern is not displayed yet, the control for newly starting the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. In addition, if the winning ball number display is already performed by the big hit pattern or the second KT pattern, control for switching to the display of the winning ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed.

  If the received effect control command is high-accuracy / first KT background designation (step S90640), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, , A yellow display color background screen) (step S90641). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag (step S90642). Further, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S90643). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to display the award ball number display by the first KT pattern in the effect display device 909 (step S90644). For example, a prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the prize ball number display by any pattern is not displayed yet, the control for newly starting the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. In addition, if the winning ball number display is already performed by the big hit pattern or the second KT pattern, control for switching to the display of the winning ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed.

  If the received effect control command is high-accuracy / second KT background designation (step S90645), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, , The background screen of the red display color) (step S90646). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the probability variation state flag and the second KT state flag (step S90647). In addition, if the effect control CPU 90201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S90648). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to display the award ball number display by the second KT pattern in the effect display device 909 (step S90649). For example, a prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if the winning ball number display by any pattern is not displayed yet, the control for newly starting the winning ball number display by the second KT pattern is performed. Also, if the winning ball number display has already been performed by the big hit pattern or the first KT pattern, the control for switching to the display of the winning ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed.

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S90639, S90644, S90649 and the processing of step S90979 of the background symbol fluctuation stop processing described later are executed, so that the big hit game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). The number of prize balls is displayed during (status), but the value of the prize ball counter when the KT state is terminated and the low probability / non-KT state is returned by executing the processing of steps S90633 and S90634. Is reset (cleared to 0) and the display of the number of prize balls is ended.

  Further, in this embodiment, the award ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state by executing the processing of steps S90639 and S90644, and the processing of step S90649 is executed in the second KT state. Although the case where the prize ball number display by the 2nd KT pattern is displayed is shown, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display may not be displayed (the processing in steps S90639 and S90644 is unnecessary).

  If the received effect control command is a grand prize opening prize designation command (step S90650), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a big prize opening prize flag indicating that a game ball has been won at the big prize opening ( At the same time as step S90651), 15 (corresponding to the number of winning balls per winning to the big winning opening) is added to the winning ball counter (step S90652).

  If the received effect control command is a special prize opening winning designation command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 9024. Along with (Step S90654), 15 (corresponding to the number of winning balls per winning to the special winning opening 9024) is added to the winning ball counter (Step S90655).

  In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is 15 is the same when the game ball is won at the special prize opening and when the game ball is won at the special prize opening 9024. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is varied such that the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball is won at a special prize opening, while the number of prize balls is 10 when a game ball is awarded to a special prize opening 9024. May be.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command (step S90660), the effect control CPU 90201 performs control for starting the customer waiting demonstration display in the effect display device 909 (step S90661). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag indicating that the display result of the previous variation display was the small hit (step S90662), and the small hit is continuously generated. The small consecutive number counter that indicates the number of times of clearing is cleared to 0 (step S90663).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the continuous small hit effect is configured to be executed when consecutive small hits occur, but the processing of steps S90662 and S90663 is executed. After the change display that is a small hit is executed, if the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, even if the subsequent change display is a small hit, the continuous small hit The production is configured not to be executed.

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S90664), the effect control CPU 90201 first receives the symbol designation command received in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. In the storage area (step S90665).

  If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step S90666), the presentation control CPU 90101 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90667).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S90670). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process (step S90706) shown in FIG. In the background symbol process, the effect control CPU 90201 first executes a reserved continuous effect control process for performing control related to the reserved continuous effect (step 90900A). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs one of steps S90900 to S90908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied. If the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 909c starts the variation. To control. The background symbol variation start condition is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any variation pattern command is received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S90901).

  Background symbol variation start processing (step S90901): Control is performed so that the variation of the left middle right background symbol is started. Further, a background symbol stop symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the background symbol variation time is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902).

  Background symbol changing process (step S90902): The end of the background symbol changing time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S90903). In the background symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 90201 may extend the background symbol change time.

  Background symbol stop process (step S90903): Control is performed to finally stop the change of the background symbol and display the stop symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900), the big hit display process (step S90904), or the small hit middle process (step S90908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904), the jackpot display process (step S90904) is performed on the condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to a value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hitting process (step S90908), the value corresponding to the small hitting display process (step S90908) is set on condition that the small hitting start designation command is received. Update.

  Big hit display processing (step S90904): Control of big hit display is performed. Then, when receiving a winning prize opening opening display command (a winning prize opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S90905).

  In-round processing (step S90905): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S90906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (during closing), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S90907): Control of the big hit end display after the end of the big hit game is performed. For example, when an ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900).

  Small hit processing (step S90908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. When the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90900).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the hold continuous effect control process (step S90900A). In this embodiment, when a big hit game is started, there is a hold memory that is a big hit among the currently stored hold memories, that is, a hold sequence that indicates that the big hit is continuously executed. Production can be performed.

  In the pending continuous effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is the start timing of the big hit game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is a jackpot display process (step S90904), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

  If it is the start timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 will issue a command at the time of start winning (that is, a symbol designation command and an effective start prize designation command (first valid start prize designation command or second valid prize). It is confirmed whether or not a command indicating a big hit is included in the set of the start winning designation command) (step S903502).

  When a command indicating a big hit is included (Y in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the big hit is continuously executed (step S903502a). In step S903502a, for example, the effect display device 909 displays a character display of “Continuous jackpot confirmation”, so that there is a holding memory that is a big hit among the currently stored holding memories, and the big hit is continuous. To be executed.

  In this embodiment, when there is a holding memory that is a big hit in the first holding memory related to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol currently stored, or the second holding concerning the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Although it is configured to be able to notify that a big hit is continuously executed when there is a reserved memory that is a big hit in the memory, it is not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the second reserved memory It is possible to notify that the big hit is continuously executed only when there is a reserved memory that becomes a big hit, and when there is a reserved memory that becomes a big hit in the first reserved memory, the big hit is continued. It may be configured not to notify that it is executed. Further, it may be possible to notify that the big hits are continuously executed only when there is a reserved memory that becomes a specific big hit (for example, a 16R probability variation big hit).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a hold continuous execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect is being executed (step S903503), and ends the process.

  If it is not the start timing of the big hit game (N in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is the timing during the big hit game (step S903504). In step S903504, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is either in-round processing (step S90905) or post-round processing (step S90906), it is determined that the timing is during a big hit game.

  If it is the timing during the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the pending continuous execution flag is set (step S903505), and if not set, the processing is terminated. If the pending continuous execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not a new round is started in the big hit game (step S903506). For example, it is possible to confirm by comparing the content of the received special winning opening open command with the content of the previously received special winning opening open display command. When a new round is started, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the total land number counter that counts the total number of rounds during the reserved continuous effect, and the effect display is performed based on the value of the total land number counter. The device 909 performs control to display the number of rounds (steps S903507 and S903508). Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the timing is not during the big hit game (N in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is the end timing of the big hit game (step S903509). In step S903509, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is the jackpot end effect process (step S90907), it is determined that the end timing of the jackpot game is reached.

  If it is the end timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903504), the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the pending continuous execution flag is set (step S903510), and if it is set, the processing is ended as it is. . If the pending continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies the gaming state after the big hit game (step S903511). In step S903511, for example, when the probability change state is controlled after the big hit game, the character display of “probability change entry” or the like is displayed on the effect display device 909, and when it is controlled to the KT state, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In “”, a character display of “small hit time entry” is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the game state after the big hit game is notified at the end timing of the big hit game. For example, at the start timing or during the execution timing of the big hit game, a character display of “with second KT” You may make it alert | report by displaying the character display of "no 2nd KT". Also in this case, the notification may be performed only when the reserved continuous effect is not executed and not when the reserved continuous effect is executed.

  If the command indicating the big hit is not included (N in step S903502), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the pending continuous execution flag (step S903512), and also resets the value of the total round number counter. (Step S903513).

  As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, when the pending continuous effect is executed by the processing of steps S903502 to S903503, the effect display device 909 displays “Continuous jackpot confirmation” when the previous jackpot game is started. By displaying the character display, it is notified that the big hit is continuously executed. In addition, the processing of steps S903504 to S903508 shows the number of rounds obtained by adding the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game and the number of rounds of the subsequent jackpot game during the execution of the hold consecutive effect, and a series of jackpot games are executed. Can appear to be.

  In addition, when the on-hold continuous effect is not being executed by the processing of steps S903509 to S903511, a game state (for example, a probability change state or a KT state) controlled after the big hit game is notified, but the on-hold continuous effect is executed. When they are in the middle, they are not notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to weaken the impression that the big hit game is finished and the normal game is started, and it is possible to make it appear that a series of big hit games are being executed in the previous big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. .

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the hold consecutive execution effect is being executed and the hold consecutive execution flag is set, after the end of the previous jackpot game, until the subsequent jackpot game is started, Even if a small hit occurs, execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, notification of a small hit, display of an increase in winning ball, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc.) is restricted. With such a configuration, the impression that the big hit game has ended and the normal game is being played is weakened, and it appears that a series of big hit games are being executed in the previous big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. it can.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start process (step S90901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90201 determines a stop symbol of the background symbol (step S90920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of place), the left middle right background symbol is completely inconsistent or only the left and right background symbols are matched. Reach out-of-reach symbol combinations. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when 16R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right background symbols are arranged in odd symbols is determined. In addition, when a display result 3 designation command or a display result 5 designation command is received (when 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the background symbols on the left middle right are even-numbered symbols. To decide. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit is determined), the same combination as the reach off-shift symbols in which only the left and right background symbols match. To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the variable display to start this time is a small hit (step S90921a). Whether or not the variable display to be started this time is a small hit is, for example, that the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step S90618) indicates a small hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not (display result 7 designation command is stored).

  If the change display to be started this time is a small hit (Y in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the pending continuous execution flag is set (step S90921b) and is set. For example, in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, a process table for pending continuous use corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used is selected (step S90921c). Then, control goes to a step S90932. The process table for holding consecutive hours selected in step S90921c is configured so that the effect related to the small hit is not executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous performance is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, after the previous big hit game is finished, the small hit is not started until the subsequent big hit game is started. Even if it occurs, execution of effects related to the small hit (for example, small hit notification or continuous small hit effect) is limited. In this embodiment, during execution of the reserved continuous production, the execution is restricted by prohibiting the execution of the production related to the small hit, but for example, it is not conspicuous (for example, the display size is small, the color is You may restrict | limit by performing in the aspect.

  If the pending continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90922). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S90931. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the second KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the previous small hit flag has been set (step S90923). If the previous small hit flag is not set (that is, if the display result of the change display executed last time is not a small hit), the effect control CPU 90201 indicates that the small hit has been continuously generated. As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect to be notified, a continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit is selected (step S90924). On the other hand, if the previous small hit flag is set (that is, if the display result of the variation display executed last time is a small hit and consecutive small hits occur), the effect control CPU 90201 As a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect, a continuous small hit effect determination table corresponding to the value of the continuous small hit number counter for counting the number of times that the small hit has continuously occurred is selected ( Step S90925).

  In this embodiment, the process of step S90922 is executed, so that the continuous small hit effect can be executed only in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, you may comprise so that a continuous small hit effect can be performed in both the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90201 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in steps S90924 and S90925, and determines the presence and type of the continuous small hit effect (step S90926).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table. Among these, FIG. 46A shows a specific example of the continuous small hit effect determination table for the previous non-small hit selected in step S90924. FIG. 46B shows a case where the value of the consecutive small hit number counter is 1 in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 (that is, the variation display started this time is continuously 2). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for two consecutive small hits) selected when a small hit is generated) is shown. FIG. 46 (C) shows a case where the value of the consecutive small hits counter in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 is 2 (that is, 3 continuously in the variable display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for three consecutive small hits) selected when a small hit is generated) is shown. FIG. 46D shows a case where the value of the consecutive small hits counter in the continuous small hit effect determination table selected in step S90925 is 3 or more (that is, continuously in the variable display started this time). A specific example of a continuous small hit effect determination table (for the case where the number of consecutive small hits is four times or more) selected when the small hit is four times or more) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the continuous small hit effect determination table, determination values are assigned to the continuous small hit effect No, the continuous small hit effect A, the continuous small hit effect B, and the continuous small hit effect C, respectively. Yes. In this embodiment, the continuous small hit effect A is, for example, an effect that causes a predetermined character A to appear on the effect display device 909 and displays a character display such as “one more time!” As a character A line. . In addition, the continuous small hit effect B is an effect in which, for example, a predetermined character B appears on the effect display device 909, and a character display such as “one more time!” Is displayed as a line of the character B. In addition, the continuous small hit effect C is, for example, an effect of causing a predetermined character C to appear on the effect display device 909 and displaying a character display such as “once again!” As a character C line.

  In this embodiment, the case where the character type is changed according to the type of the continuous small hit effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the character display type may be varied according to the type of the continuous small hit effect, or the display color of the character display may be varied. Further, as the continuous small hit effect, an effect of lighting the decoration lamp 9025 and the frame lamps 28a to 28c may be executed, or an effect of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 9027 may be executed. Various aspects of production can be considered.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where it comprises so that three types of continuous small hit effects A-C of continuous small hit effects AC can be performed is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect, and four or more types of continuous small hit effects are demonstrated. You may comprise so that a hit effect can be performed, and you may comprise only two types of continuous small hit effects. Moreover, you may be comprised so that there may be only one kind of continuous small hit effect.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the previous fluctuation display is not a small hit (that is, when the small hits are not continuously generated), there is no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 100%. It is determined. In this embodiment, when the previous fluctuation display is not a small hit, the continuous small hit effect is not executed. Therefore, when it is determined as N in step S90923, it is not changed. You may comprise so that it may transfer to step S90931. If comprised in that way, the continuous small hit production | presentation determination table for last non-small hits can be made unnecessary.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), when the small hits are generated twice continuously in the present variation display, it is determined that there is no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 80%. It is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect A. In addition, you may comprise not only the aspect shown by this embodiment but the determination of the continuous small hit effect B and the continuous small hit effect C in a low ratio.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), when the small hits are generated three times consecutively in this variation display, it is determined that there is no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 30%. It is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect A, and it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect B at a rate of 50%. That is, the continuous small hit effect B is executed at a relatively high rate. In addition, you may comprise not only the aspect shown by this embodiment but the determination of the continuous small hit | direction effect C in a low ratio.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), when the small hits are continuously generated four times or more in the present variation display, it is determined that there is no continuous small hit effect at a rate of 20%, and a rate of 10% Is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect A at a rate of 20%, and is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect C at a rate of 50%. . That is, the continuous small hit effect C is executed at a relatively high rate.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect A already being executed in the second consecutive small hit change is high, FIGS. 46 (C) and 46 (D). As shown in the figure, the execution ratio of the continuous small hit effect A is set to be low in the third small hit fluctuation continuously. Also, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), since the ratio of the continuous small hit effect B already being executed in the third consecutive small hit variation is high, as shown in FIG. In the small hit variation, the execution ratio of the continuous small hit effect B is set to be low. By configuring as such, in this embodiment, the same type of effect as the type of effect previously performed as the continuous small hit effect is less likely to be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where the same kind of effect as the kind of effect previously executed as the continuous small hit effect is less likely to be executed by the allocation of the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIG. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the continuous small hit effect A is executed, a flag indicating that the continuous small hit effect A has been executed is set. If the flag is set, it may be configured such that a continuous small hit effect other than the continuous small hit effect A can be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the previous fluctuation display is a small hit (when a continuous small hit occurs), the continuous small hit effect determination table shown in FIGS. 46 (B) to (D) is used. Although the case where it comprises so that the presence / absence and kind of a continuous small hit effect may be determined by performing a lottery process is shown, it is not restricted to such a processing mode. For example, when the previous change display is a small hit, the lottery process may be performed without executing a lottery process unconditionally.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, a case is shown in which the type of continuous small hit effect to be executed is determined from a plurality of types of continuous small hit effects AC by lottery processing. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the type of continuous small hit effect may be fixedly determined according to the number of consecutive small hits. For example, if it is the second consecutive small hit, the continuous small hit effect A is fixedly determined, and if it is the third consecutive small hit, the continuous small hit effect B is fixedly determined. If it is a hit, the continuous small hit effect C may be fixedly determined.

  When it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect (Y in step S90927), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the background pattern variation pattern to be used and the determination according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. A process table corresponding to the kind of continuous small hit effect is selected (step S90928). Then, control goes to a step S90932.

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 909 continuously displays during the background symbol variation display by executing the processing in step S90933 described later using the process table selected in step S90928 and the step S90944 of the background symbol variation in-process. A small hit effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, in the second KT state, when a small hit is made on the basis of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the ratio of the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is increased (this book) In the example, as shown in FIG. 22 (I) and FIG. 23, the second variation pattern # 27 of the shortening variation is determined at a rate of 95% when the small hit is made during the second KT state). In some cases, a variation display other than the variation is performed (in this example, the second variation pattern # 28 having a relatively long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) may be determined). Therefore, for example, in the background symbol fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 45, when the current fluctuation display is a small hit fluctuation, it is further determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of a shortening fluctuation. By executing the processing of steps S90992 to S90928 only when the pattern is a pattern so that the continuous small hit effect can be executed, the continuous small hit effect is always executed in the variation display of the shortening variation. Configure as follows.

  If the variable display to be started this time is not a small hit (N in step S90921a), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the previous small hit flag if it is set (step S90929) and the number of consecutive small hits. The counter value is cleared to 0 (step S90930).

  After clearing the small hit consecutive number counter in step S90930, if the second KT state flag has not been set (N in step S90922), or if it is decided not to execute the continuous small hit effect (N in step S90927) In step S90931, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S90932). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 909, various lamps, speaker 9027) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S90933). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 90209 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the background symbol display unit 909c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 9070 in order to output audio from the speaker 9027.

  If the execution of the continuous effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 26, # 28, # 29), step S90933 and the background described later are performed according to the process table selected in steps S90928 and S90931. By performing the process of step S90944 of the process during symbol variation, the continuous effect is performed during the variation display of the background symbol. Further, when execution of the battle effect is specified in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 16, # 18, # 19, # 21, # 23, # 24, # 29), steps S90928 and S90931 are performed. According to the process table selected in step S90933 and the process of step S90944 of the background symbol changing process described later are executed, a battle effect is executed during the background symbol changing display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the background symbol variation time timer, and starts the background symbol variation time timer (step S90934). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S90902) (step S90935).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S90902) in the background symbol process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 90201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S90940) and subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S90941). When the process timer times out (step S90942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S90943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S90944).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 executes background symbol variation time extension processing (step S90950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, There is a possibility that the variation display of the special symbol may be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, the background symbol variation time extension process in step S90950 is executed, so that when the background symbol variation display is executed corresponding to the one symbol special variation display, the other special symbol variation display is performed. When the symbol variation display is started, the variation pattern of the background symbol is replaced or the variation time is extended as necessary.

  In step S90950, for example, when the effect control CPU 90201 is executing the variation display of the background symbol corresponding to the variation display of one special symbol that is out of place, the variation display of the other special symbol that is a big hit is performed. When started, processing is performed to replace the background symbol variation pattern and extend the variation time in correspondence with the special symbol of the big hit. Also, for example, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is a big hit, when the variation display of the other special symbol that is out of place is started, The change display of the currently executed background symbol is executed as it is without changing the change pattern or extending the change time. In addition, for example, when the variation display of the other special symbol that is a big hit is started when the variation display of the background symbol is executed in response to the variation display of one special symbol that is a big hit, it has already been described. As described above, in this embodiment, since the change display of the special symbol that was started later is forced out of the way, the background pattern currently being executed is not replaced without changing the background pattern change pattern or extending the change time. The symbol variation display is executed as it is.

  If the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S90951), the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S90903) (step S90952). ).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the background symbol fluctuation stopping process (step S90903) in the background symbol process. In the background symbol fluctuation stopping process, the effect control CPU 90201 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the background symbol stop symbol is set (step S90970A). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S90974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S90973. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to step S90974.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S90970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S90983. In this embodiment, when a small hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S90982. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, since the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S90971 is displayed. The process moves to step S90983 without executing the display process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 90201 displays a stop symbol (out-of-line symbol or jackpot symbol) of the left middle right background symbol that is being stopped on the effect display device 909. , Small hit symbol) is controlled (step S90971).

  When the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90972), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90973).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S90974). . If any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S90975). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S90976). In step S90976, when the pending continuous execution flag is set, a process table for pending continuous time may be selected. This process table for holding consecutive times indicates that, for example, a fanfare effect that emphasizes the start of a new jackpot game is not executed, a simple fanfare effect is executed, or an alternative to a fanfare effect is performed. An effect or the like indicating that it is resumed is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that a series of jackpot games are being executed in the previous jackpot game and the subsequent jackpot game.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and speaker 9027 as an effect component) is executed according to data 1) (step S90978).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 controls the effect display device 909 to display a prize ball number display with a big hit pattern (step S90979). For example, a prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 909. In this case, if no winning ball number display by any pattern is displayed yet, the control for starting the new winning ball number display by the big hit pattern is performed. In addition, if the winning ball number display has already been performed by the first KT pattern or the second KT pattern, control for switching to display of the winning ball number display by the big hit pattern is performed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the winning ball number display is started or switched (see step S90979) by the jackpot pattern in the background symbol fluctuation stopping process shown in FIG. 48 is shown, but such a mode is limited. Absent. For example, the same process as step S90979 is performed in the big hit display process (step S90904) or the first round process after starting the big hit game (step S90905), and the start or switching of the winning ball number display by the big hit pattern is performed. You may comprise as follows.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90904) (step S90980).

  When the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S90971 (Y in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90982).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set (step S90983). When the small hitting start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hitting start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S90984). The effect control CPU 90201 also resets the set small hitting start command reception flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit effect (step S90985). In step S90985, when the pending continuous execution flag is set, a process table for pending continuous time may be selected. The process table for holding consecutive times is configured such that, for example, a small hit effect is not executed, a simple small hit effect is executed, or an alternative to the small hit effect is executed. With such a configuration, when the hold continuous performance is being executed and the hold continuous execution flag is set, after the previous big hit game is finished, the small hit is not started until the subsequent big hit game is started. Even if it occurs, the execution of the effect related to the small hit is limited.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S90986), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, and speaker 9027 as effect component) is executed according to data 1) (step S90987).

  Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting middle processing (step S90908) (step S90988).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S90971 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S90972 and N in step S90981), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the background symbol. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90909) (step S90989).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the middle hit process (step S90908) in the background symbol process. In the small hitting process, the effect control CPU 90201 first checks whether or not the small hitting end command reception flag is set (step S909201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is not yet received), the effect control CPU 90201 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S909202). Then, according to the contents of the process data n, processing for controlling the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, etc.) is executed (step S909203). That is, the performance corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S909204), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S909205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S909206).

  When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 90201 finishes the presentation corresponding to the small hit game, and step S909207 is performed. Migrate to In step S909207, if the effect control CPU 90201 is not set, the previous small hit flag is set (step S909207). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 adds 1 to the value of the small hits continuous number counter (step S909208).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the variable display other than the small hitting is started, the previous small hitting flag is reset and the value of the consecutive small hitting counter is cleared to 0 (see steps S90929 and S90930). ). For this reason, when a small hit game is executed on the basis of the first fluctuation display that is a small hit after executing the variable display other than the small hit, the processing of steps S909207 and S909208 is executed, The small hit flag is set and 1 is set in the small hit consecutive number counter. Therefore, when the next variation display is again a small hit, it can be determined that the small hit has occurred twice consecutively based on the value of the consecutive small hit counter being 1. When the small hit game is completed, step S909208 is executed, so that the value of the continuous small hit counter is updated to 2. Further, if the next fluctuation display is again a small hit, Based on the value of the number counter being 2, it can be determined that three consecutive small hits have occurred. After that, even if the small hits occur continuously 4 times, 5 times, etc., by checking the value of the small hits continuous number counter, how many consecutive small hits are generated Can be determined.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S90910) (step S909209).

  50 to 53 are flowcharts showing the winning ball number display process (step S90707). In the winning ball number display process, the effect control CPU 90201 first checks whether or not the big winning opening winning flag is set (step S90500). If the big prize opening prize flag is set (that is, if a prize winning to the big prize opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the big prize opening prize flag (step S90501) and the first prize. It is checked whether or not a first prize ball increasing effect executing flag indicating that the ball increasing effect is being executed is set (step S90502). If the first prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90506.

  If the first prize-ball increasing effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the first prize-ball increasing effect has not yet been executed), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the first prize-ball increasing effect is performed (step S90503). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a first prize ball increasing effect executing flag (step S90504). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

  In this embodiment, the winning ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or in the KT state (the first KT state or the second KT state). However, when the winning ball number display is displayed, When a game ball is won in the special prize opening 9024, a prize ball increasing effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls shown in the prize ball number display increases one by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increasing effects: a first prize ball increasing effect to a third prize ball increasing effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number increases by one at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the prize ball number display by the big hit pattern is displayed during the big hit game. This is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to do. Further, the second prize ball increasing effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed during the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that it increases by one. Further, the third prize ball increasing effect is obtained when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed during the second KT state at the relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that it increases by one.

  In this embodiment, the winning flag winning flag is set (the winning to the big winning mouth has occurred) is a case where a big hit game is being played and the winning ball number display by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, the first prize-ball increasing effect is started in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed in the prize-ball number display displayed by the big hit pattern in step S90503.

  If the grand prize winning prize flag is not set (that is, if no prize winning in the big prize winning has occurred), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the first prize ball increasing effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S90505). If the first prize-ball increasing effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the first prize-ball increasing effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90510.

  If the first prize-ball increasing effect execution flag is set in step S90502 or step S90505 (that is, if the first prize-ball increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 receives a prize in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed since the start of the effect of increasing the number of winning balls by 1) (step S90506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls for which the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S90507). If the award ball number display after the award ball number is incremented by 1 does not yet coincide with the award ball number indicated by the award ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again wins the award ball at the first speed in the effect display device 909. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the first prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S90508). Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

  If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number has increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the first prize ball increase effect execution flag ( Step S90509), the first prize ball increasing effect is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S90510.

  In this embodiment, when a winning at the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 winning balls is immediately performed (see step S9030), and 15 is immediately added to the winning ball counter. (See step S90652), but by executing the processing of steps S90500 to S90509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value obtained by adding 15, but the first speed (this example) The number of prize balls is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by 1 in 0.1 second). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for a single winning prize opening. The number display is updated. In this case, there may be a case where a winning to the next big winning opening occurs before the update of the number of all 15 winning balls is completed. For example, the fifth of 15 winning balls Even if the next prize winning slot is displayed at the stage where the increase in the number of winning balls has only been displayed until then, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth winning balls is increased continues. The first prize ball increase effect will continue to be executed until the display of the increase in the number of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added for the new winning is completed (in this case, additional The number of award balls is updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of award balls generated in step 3). However, in this embodiment, when the first prize-ball increasing effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the big hit game is finished. By the end, the production in which all the number of prize balls is increased is completed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not a special winning opening prize flag is set (step S90510). If the special winning award winning flag is set (that is, if a winning to the special winning opening 9024 has occurred), the effect control CPU 90201 resets the special winning award winning flag (step S90511), It is confirmed whether or not the execution flag is set (step S90511a). If the pending continuous execution flag is set, the process is terminated as it is. In other words, even if a special winning opening 9024 is won during the execution of the reserved consecutive effects, the process ends without performing any effects related to the small win such as a prize-ball increasing effect or a winning effect. If the pending continuous execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S90512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the flow shifts to step S90523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S90513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process is ended as it is. In other words, even if a special prize opening 9024 is rarely generated during the non-KT state, the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, so that the process is terminated without performing the prize ball increase effect.

  If the first KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 90201 is executing the second prize ball increasing effect indicating that the second prize ball increasing effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S90514). If the second prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90519.

  If the second prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 receives the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 909. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting the second prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S90515). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a second prize ball increasing effect executing flag (step S90516). Then, control goes to a step S90540.

  In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the award ball number display according to the first KT pattern is displayed, so that the first KT pattern is displayed in step S90515. In the displayed number of prize balls, a second prize ball increase effect is started in which the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example).

  If the special winning award winning flag is not set (that is, if a special winning opening 9024 has not been won), the third prize ball increasing effect indicating that the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed is executed. It is checked whether the middle flag is set (step S90517). If the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533. If the third prize ball increase production execution flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase production execution flag is not executed), the production control CPU 90201 sets the second prize ball increase production execution flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S90518). If the second prize ball increasing effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increasing effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S90540.

  If the second prize-ball increasing effect execution flag is set in step S90514 or step S90518 (that is, if the second prize-ball increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a prize in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed since the start of the effect of increasing the number of winning balls by 1) (step S90519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls for which the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S90520). If the award ball number display after the award ball number is incremented by 1 does not yet coincide with the award ball number indicated by the award ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again wins the award ball at the first speed in the effect display device 909. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and control for starting a second prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S90521). Then, control goes to a step S90540.

  If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number has increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag ( Step S90522), the second prize ball increasing effect is ended. Then, control goes to a step S90540.

  In this embodiment, when a special winning opening 9024 is won in the small hit game that occurred during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S90655), the prize ball number display is immediately updated to the value to which 15 has been added by executing the processing of steps S90510 to S90522. Rather, the award ball number display is updated in such a manner that the award ball number increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 until the update of all 15 winning balls is completed for one winning in the special winning opening 9024. The award ball number display is updated over the second. In this case, there may be a case where a winning to the next special winning opening 9024 occurs before the update of all 15 winning balls is completed. For example, 5 of 15 winning balls Even when the winning display to the next special winning opening 9024 occurs at the stage where only the increase in the number of winning balls has been displayed up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next six winning balls continues to increase And the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the display of the increase of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case) In addition, the number of prize balls will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in addition). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize-ball increasing effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is finished. By the time, the effect that the number of prize balls increases is configured to end.

  If the second KT state flag is set in step S90512 (that is, if the second KT state is in effect), effect control CPU 90201 performs control to start effect effect in effect display device 909 (step S90523). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not a winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S90524). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S90525). Then, control goes to a step S90529.

  If the winning effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 909. Is displayed (step S90526), and the effect display device 909 is controlled to start a winning effect (step S90527). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a winning effect executing flag (step S90528). Then, control goes to a step S90529.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the third prize ball increasing effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed is set (step S90529). If the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S90533.

  If the third prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the effect display device 909 in the second KT pattern. Control to start the enlarged display of the displayed number of prize balls is performed (step S90530). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 starts an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed on the effect display device 909, and performs control to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S90531). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a third prize ball increasing effect executing flag (step S90532). Then, control goes to a step S90540.

  In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag has been set (during the second KT state) means that the award ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed, so that in step S90531, the second KT state flag is displayed. In the displayed number of prize balls displayed in an enlarged manner, a third prize ball increase effect is started in which the number of prize balls increases by one at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

  If the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag is set in step S90517 or step S90529 (that is, if the third prize ball increasing effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the effect effect end timing and It is confirmed whether or not (step S90533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect production is set, for example, when the effect production is started in step S90523, a timer for measuring the production period of the effect production is set and the timer times out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to end the effect effect in the effect display device 909 (step S90534).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the prize ball number display is completed (that is, whether or not 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S90535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is finished in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 90201 displays the number of prize balls for which the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 is indicated by the prize ball number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state coincides with (step S90536). If the award ball number display after the award ball number is incremented by 1 does not yet match the award ball number indicated by the award ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 again wins the award ball at the second speed in the effect display device 909. An effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and a control for starting the third prize ball increasing effect is performed (step S90537). Then, control goes to a step S90540.

  If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number has increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 90201 is displayed in the effect display device 909 in the second KT pattern. Control for terminating the enlarged display of the number of winning balls is performed (step S90538). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 resets the third prize ball increasing effect execution flag (step S90539), and ends the third prize ball increasing effect. Then, control goes to a step S90540.

  In this embodiment, when a special winning opening 9024 is won in the small hit game that occurred during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S9030) and immediately. Although 15 is added to the winning ball counter (see step S90655), 15 is immediately added to the winning ball number display by executing the processing of steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90532, and S90535 to S90359. Rather than being updated, the effect effect is executed and the award ball number display is enlarged, and the award ball number is incremented by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The award ball number display is updated in such a manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, 0.5 seconds × 15 = 7.5 until the update of all the 15 winning balls is completed for one winning in the special winning opening 9024. The award ball number display is updated over the second. In this case, there may be a case where a winning to the next special winning opening 9024 occurs before the update of all 15 winning balls is completed. For example, 5 of 15 winning balls Even when the winning display to the next special winning opening 9024 occurs at the stage where only the increase in the number of winning balls has been displayed up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next six winning balls continues to increase The third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new winning is finished (in this case) The prize ball number display is updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in addition).

  Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize-ball increasing effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is finished. There is a case where an effect of increasing the number of all the prize balls is not finished before the game is finished. In this embodiment, the winning ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and is in the midst of a variable display, a big hit game or a small hit game. Regardless of whether or not the timer interruption occurs, if the third prize ball increase effect does not end during the small hit game, the third prize is displayed over the variable display after the small hit game ends. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (further, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games across the variable display).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not a winning effect executing flag is set (step S90540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 90201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S90541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is set, for example, when a winning effect is started in step S90527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set and the timer times out. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to end the winning effect in the effect display device 909 (step S90542).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 checks whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S90543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 90201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S90544). In addition, the effect control CPU 90201 performs control to display a prize-ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 909 (step S90545), and starts the winning effect on the effect display device 909. Control is performed (step S90546).

  If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effecting CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S90547).

  In this embodiment, when the special winning opening 9024 is generated during the second KT state by executing the processing of steps S90524 to S90528 and S90540 to S90547, a prize-ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a winning effect is executed. In this case, there may be a case where a new winning to the next special prize opening 9024 may occur during the execution of the winning effect. In such a case, the system waits until the winning winning effect being executed ends. The display of the next prize ball increase display and the prize presentation effect are executed after the winning prize effect being executed is finished (the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize presentation effect are executed with a delay).

  Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the winning ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed with a delay, the display of all the winning ball increase displays and the winning effects will be performed before the end of the small hit game. It may be impossible to execute. In this embodiment, the winning ball number display process (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and is in the midst of a variable display, a big hit game or a small hit game. Regardless of whether or not the timer interruption occurs, if the display of the winning ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the variation display after the small hit game ends. The display of the winning ball increase display and the winning effect are executed (in addition, the displaying of the winning ball increase and the winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display interposed therebetween).

  In this embodiment, the effect presentation is also executed when a prize is awarded to the special prize opening 9024, but the effect presentation is immediately executed at the timing when the prize winning to the special prize opening 9024 occurs. (Refer to Steps S90523, S90533, and S90534).

  In this embodiment, the prize ball number display effect (step S90707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the background symbol process process, the step You may comprise so that a prize ball number display effect (step S90707) may be performed before performing the process of S90900-S90908.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize-ball-increasing display or a winning effect is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 9024. For example, a special winning opening lamp 9024a is further provided. You may comprise so that it may light-display.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is a case in which an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by one by executing a prize ball increasing effect based on the occurrence of a prize at the big prize opening or the special prize opening 9024 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to have a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening that does not open a variable winning ball apparatus even if a winning is made and only pays out a predetermined number (for example, five) winning balls) In this case, it may be configured to execute an effect in which a prize ball increasing effect is executed and the number of prize balls is increased by one even when a winning in a general winning opening occurs. In this case, when a prize is awarded to the general winning opening, an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at a first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) is executed uniformly in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a win to the general prize opening occurs, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. You may perform a production that goes on. Even in the case of such a configuration, if the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), the prize-ball-increasing effect is produced even if a winning in the general winning opening occurs. May not be executed.

  Next, specific examples of the KT notification and the small hit notification in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of KT notification and small hit notification. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of restrictions on KT notification and small hit notification. 54 and 55, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C).

  FIG. 54 shows a specific example of the KT notification and the small hit notification when the on-hold continuous effect is not being executed. As shown in FIG. 54A, during the big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character display 90302 such as “Don't hit big!” Is displayed as a dialogue of the character 90301.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), when the big hit game is finished, a character display 9031 such as a speech “small hit time entry” of the character 90301 is displayed as a KT notification for notifying that it is controlled to the second KT state. (See step S903511).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 54 (C) and 54 (D), when the effect display device 909 starts to display the variation of the background symbol on the left middle right, and when the small hit symbol “135” is derived and displayed, As the notification, for example, a character display 90306 such as “Occurrence of small hit!” Is displayed. In addition, a prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern is displayed.

  FIG. 55 shows a specific example when the KT notification and the small hit notification are restricted when the hold continuous effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 55A, during the first big hit game, for example, the character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and a character display 90302 such as “Big hit!” Is displayed as a dialogue of the character 90301. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), even if the big hit game is over, the hold continuous effect is still being executed, so the KT notification is not performed (that is, the character display 9031 such as “small hit time entry” is displayed). (Refer to Steps S903509 to S903510), the character 90301 and the character display 90302 are continuously displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), after the first big hit game, the small hit symbol “135” is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and even if a small hit occurs, the small hit notification is not performed. (That is, the character display 90306 such as “Occurrence of small hit!” Is not displayed). At the same time, display of a prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and execution of effects related to the small hit is restricted. In the example shown in FIG. 55C, the number of rounds (in this example, “Round 16”) is continuously displayed from the time of the last round of the first jackpot game, and “Still! ”Or the like is displayed, which shows that the big hit game is continuing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55D, when the second big hit game is started, for example, a character 90301 is displayed on the effect display device 909, and characters such as “Don't hit big!” A display 90302 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 55D, a round number display (in this example, “Round 17”) is displayed by adding the number of rounds of the first jackpot game to the number of rounds of the second jackpot game. It is shown that a series of jackpot games are being executed (see steps S903504 to S903508). Note that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 55. An effect that a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order through the previous jackpot game period, the variable display period after the jackpot game ends, and the subsequent jackpot game period. Or a specific movie image (for example, an image such as a movie in which a character moves based on a specific story) may be displayed to make it appear as if a series of big hit games are being executed. .

  Next, the relationship between the contents of the on-hold storage and the restrictions on KT notification and small hit notification will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the relationship between the contents of the hold storage and the restrictions on KT notification and small hit notification.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (A), when the big hit game is started, if there is a hold memory 4 that is a big hit among the currently stored hold memories 1 to 4, the big hit is continuously executed. The notification of the hold reed is notified. In this case, KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the end of the big hit game. Further, even if a small hit occurs based on the holds 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification is not performed. At the same time, display of a prize ball increase display, winning effect, continuous small hit effect, etc. are not performed, and execution of effects related to the small hit is restricted.

  When it is informed that a big hit will occur several times in a short time due to the holding continuous production, at the same time, it will be informed that the period during which the KT state (particularly the second KT state) is controlled after the big hit game is short. There is a risk of reducing interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when notifying that the big hit is continuously executed by the holding continuous effect, the KT notification regarding the KT state is not performed after the big hit game ends, and even if the small hit occurs. By restricting not to make small hits notifications (and effects related to small wins such as display of prize ball increase display, winning effects, continuous small hit effects, etc.), it makes you feel that a series of big hit games are being executed. , It is prevented from deteriorating the interest by holding rendition.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot of the previous jackpot or the subsequent jackpot, when the jackpot game is started, if there is a hold memory that becomes a jackpot, it is possible to execute the hold consecutive effect, For example, the big hit type of the subsequent big hit is a big hit other than the 16R positive variation big hit (that is, the 2R normal big hit, the 2R positive big hit, the 6R normal big hit and the 6R positive big hit which are not controlled in the second KT state), and the big hit of the previous big hit If the type corresponds to either 16R probability variation big hit (ie, big hit controlled to the second KT state) or both, it is notified that the second KT state is a short period. Therefore, the execution of the reserved continuous production may be restricted (for example, prohibited or the execution frequency is reduced). In addition, for example, when it is a configuration that is always controlled to the KT state (or the second KT state) after the big hit game, the hold continuous effect may be executable.

  Further, the situation where the hold continuous effect can be executed is limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), the big hit type of the previous big hit is a big hit other than the 16R probability variable big hit (that is, 2R normal which is not controlled to the second KT state) A big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 6R normal big hit and 6R positive big hit) and the subsequent big hit type is 16R positive variable big hit (that is, big hit controlled to the 2nd KT state). It may be possible. In this case, it is desirable that the next jackpot is generated early without being controlled to the second KT state after the end of the previous jackpot game, so that the entertainment will not be lowered by the reserved continuous performance. . Therefore, along with the big hit game, it may be notified that the second KT state is not controlled after the end of the current big hit game. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (B), the jackpot type for the subsequent jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot (that is, the jackpot controlled to the second KT state), but regardless of the jackpot type for the subsequent jackpot, When the big hit type of the previous big hit is a big hit other than the 16R probability variable big hit (that is, the 2R normal big hit, the 2R positive big hit, the 6R normal big hit, and the 6R normal big hit that are not controlled in the second KT state) You may make it do. In this case as well, it is desirable that the next big hit be generated early, so that the interest will not be lowered by the reserved continuous performance.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), when both the big hit type and the big hit type after the big hit are both 16R probability variable big hits (that is, big hits controlled to the second KT state), the big hit game starts. When the game is played (or during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game), after notifying that the control is not controlled to the second KT state after the end of the current big hit game, You may make it perform alerting | reporting. In this case, even if a small hit occurs on the basis of the holds 1 to 3 after the big hit game, the small hit notification (and the display related to the small hit such as the display of the increased prize ball display, the winning effect, the continuous small hit effect) is performed. Limit it from being broken. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to be recognized in the same situation as in the case of FIG. 56 (B) described above, and to prevent the entertainment from being lowered by the reserved continuous performance.

  In addition, when executing a hold continuous effect, control is not performed as if a series of big hit games are being executed, and a normal game is executed between the previous big hit game and the subsequent big hit game. May be.

  FIG. 57 is a modified example of the hold continuous effect control process in the case shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (C) in which a normal game is played between the previous jackpot game and the subsequent jackpot game. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the hold continuous effect control process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the big hit game (step S903501). In step S903501, for example, if the value of the background symbol process flag is a jackpot display process (step S90904), it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot game.

  If it is the start timing of the big hit game (Y in step S903501), the effect control CPU 90201 will issue a command at the time of start winning (that is, a symbol designation command and an effective start prize designation command (first valid start prize designation command or second valid prize). It is confirmed whether or not a command indicating 16R probability variation big hit (that is, big hit controlled to the second KT state) is included in the set of the start winning designation command) (step S903510).

  If a command indicating 16R probability variable big hit is not included (N in step S903510), whether or not the presentation control CPU 90201 is controlled to the second KT state after the current big hit game according to the current big hit type. Is notified (step S903516). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying a character display of “with second KT” or a character display of “without second KT”. Thereafter, if the pending continuous execution flag is set, it is reset (step S903515), and the process is terminated.

  If the command indicating the 16R probability variation big hit is included (Y in step S903510), the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the current big hit is the 16R probability big hit (that is, the big hit controlled to the second KT state). After the big hit game, the fact that it is not controlled to the second KT state is notified (steps S903511, S903512). For example, the effect display device 909 is notified by displaying a character display of “No second KT”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90201 notifies that the big hit exists in the hold storage and the big hit is continuously executed (step S903513). For example, in the effect display device 909, the display of the character display of “Continuous jackpot confirmation” is notified that the jackpot is continuously executed. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a hold continuous execution flag indicating that the hold continuous effect is being executed (step S903514), and ends the process.

  By executing the processing of Steps S903510, S903511, and S903513, control is performed to a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit (that is, the 2R normal big hit that is not controlled to the second KT state, the 2R positive big hit, the 6R normal big hit, and the 6R positive big hit). Sometimes, if there is a holding memory that becomes a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, a big hit controlled to the second KT state), it is possible to execute the holding continuous effect. In addition, when the processing of steps S90310, S903511, S903512, and S903513 is executed to control to 16R probability variation big hit (that is, big hit controlled to the second KT state), 16R probability variation big hit (that is, second KT state). If there is an on-hold storage that becomes a big hit controlled by the KT, it is possible to execute the on-hold continuous effect after notifying that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled to the second KT state. In the example of FIG. 57, after the notification that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled to the second KT state, the holding continuous effect is executed. After executing (that is, after notifying that the big hits are continuously executed), it may be notified that the big hit controlled this time is a big hit that is not controlled to the second KT state.

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. 58 to 61 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect modes of the prize ball increasing effect. Among these, FIG. 58 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 59 shows a specific example of an effect mode of a prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state. FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 show a specific example of the effect form of the prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state. 58 to 61, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C).

  First, with reference to FIG. 58, a specific example of an effect mode of a prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of winning in a big winning opening during a big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 58A, when the big hit game is being played, the effect display device 909 displays a winning ball number display 90300 based on the big hit pattern (see step S90979) and, for example, a character 90301 is displayed. In addition, a case where a character display 90302 such as “Big hit!” Is displayed as a line of the character 90301 is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the prize ball number display 90300 is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90300 by the big hit pattern. Yes.

  Next, it is assumed that a prize at the big prize opening occurs during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the effect display device 909 executes an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed, and executes the first prize ball increase effect (see steps S90500 to S90509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively fast speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. Thus, when the update of the display of all the prize balls is completed, the first prize ball increase effect is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a specific example of the effect mode of the prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of a prize at the special prize opening 9024 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 59A, in the first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays a prize ball number display 90303 based on the first KT pattern (see steps S90639 and S90644), and a small hit. For example, a case where a character display 304 such as “Occurrence of small hit!” Is displayed is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the prize ball number display 90303 is displayed at the upper right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90303 by the first KT pattern. ing.

  Next, it is assumed that a special winning opening 9024 is won during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59B, the effect display device 909 executes an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed, and executes a second prize ball increase effect (see steps S90510 to S90522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 59 (C). Thus, when the update of the display of all the prize balls is completed, the second prize ball increase effect is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, a specific example of an effect mode of a prize-ball increasing effect that is executed based on the occurrence of a winning in the special winning opening 9024 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 60A, in the second KT state, the effect display device 909 displays a prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern (see step S90649) and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a case where a character display 90306 such as “occurrence of small hit!” Is displayed is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, there is a case where a prize ball number display 90305 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 as the prize ball number display 90305 by the second KT pattern. It is shown.

  Next, it is assumed that a special winning opening 9024 is won during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60B, the effect display is started on the effect display device 909 (see step S90523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 90305 is started (see step S90530). In the example shown in FIG. 60B, a case where a predetermined effect image 90307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 90305 is shown as an effect effect. . Further, when a winning at the special winning opening 9024 occurs, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a winning ball increase display is displayed (see step S90526) and a winning effect is started (see step S90527). In the example shown in FIG. 60B, an effect in which a predetermined character 90308 is displayed as a winning effect is executed, and a character display 90309 such as “+15” is displayed as an increased prize ball display. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 60C, the effect display device 909 starts the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (steps S90510, S90517, S90529). To S90539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (C) to 61 (H), in the third prize ball increasing effect, the second prize ball increasing effect and the second prize ball increasing effect are compared with the second prize ball increasing effect. The award ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), it is assumed that the effect production has ended (the prize production has continued), and a new prize has entered the next special prize opening 9024 during the execution of the prize production. And In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the effect display is started in the effect display device 909 (see step S90523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the display of the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

  Next, it is assumed that the effect effect has ended as shown in FIG. 61 (F), and that the prize effect has ended as shown in FIG. 61 (G). Then, when the winning effect is finished, based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), a prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S90526) and the winning effect is displayed. An effect is started (see step S90527).

  Thereafter, the second prize ball increase effect is displayed until all the prize ball number displays are updated including the number of prize balls based on the prize winning to the special prize opening 9024 additionally generated in FIG. 61 (E). Executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the effect image 90307 is displayed as a sparkling effect around the award ball number display 90305 as an effect presentation. However, the effect is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, it may be configured to execute an effect that affects the prize ball number display 90305 in some form, such as displaying an image that covers the prize ball number display 90305 as the effect effect. By acting on the award ball number display 90305 as such, an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the award ball number display 90305 may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the prize ball number obtained during the KT state is added to the prize ball number obtained during the big hit game to display the prize ball number is shown. Not only that, the number of winning balls acquired during the big hit game and the number of winning balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is being played, the number of prize balls won in the big hit game is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the form shown in FIG. 58, and in the form shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed on the upper right corner of the display screen of the effect display device 909, or the second KT is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 909 in the manner shown in FIG. The number of winning balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of winning balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately).

  Further, for example, (1) when the KT state is once ended and the big hit game is started, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the number of prize balls displayed during the big hit game is displayed. (2) The award ball number display of the number of award balls acquired during the KT state is continued until the KT state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-KT state. It may be configured. In addition, according to the aspect of (2), the interest with respect to a game can be improved by being able to recognize the acquired number of prize balls only in the KT state.

  Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 62 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 62, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first winning is generated when the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the winning ball number display is started (step S90530). (Refer to) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first winning is started, and the third prize ball increase effect is started (see Steps S90510, S90517, S90529 to S90539), and the effect effect is executed (Step). S90523). In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, a winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S90527).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increasing effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect production is immediately executed, and the third prize ball increase production is continuously executed by taking over the number of prize balls increased by the second winning. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 62, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second winning is generated, the winning effect for the second winning is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. In addition, after the winning effect for the first winning is finished, the winning effect for the second winning is delayed.

  After that, even after the special prize opening 9024 (special variable prize ball device 9022) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is finished, all the prize ball numbers are updated in the third prize ball increase effect. If it is not finished or if all the winning effects have not been finished, as shown in FIG. 62, after the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the change display after the end of the small hit game and further in the next small hit game, The third prize ball increasing effect and the winning effect can be continuously executed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous small hit effect. In FIG. 63, for example, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (A) and (B-1). At the start timing of the variable display that is a small hit, as shown in FIG. 63A, the variable display of the left middle right background symbol is started. In this case, the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect is determined when the variable display is started (see step S90926).

  When it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect A, when it becomes the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 63 (B-1), a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 909. As A90310 appears, the continuous small hit effect A is executed in such a manner that a character display 90311 such as “one more time!” Is displayed as a dialogue of the character A90310.

  Further, when it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect B, when it becomes the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display, as shown in FIG. Character B90312 appears, and the continuous small hit effect B is executed in such a manner that a character display 90311 such as “one more time!” Is displayed as a dialogue of the character B90312.

  Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect C, when it becomes the execution timing of the continuous small hit effect during the variable display, as shown in FIG. No. C90313 appears, and the continuous small hit effect C is executed in such a manner that a character display 903111 such as “one more time!” Is displayed as a dialogue of the character C90313.

  Next, the production timing of the continuous small hit production will be described. FIG. 64 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the continuous small hit effect. As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in this embodiment, even if a small hit occurs, if a small hit does not occur continuously in a plurality of fluctuation displays (before and after the fluctuation display that has become a small hit). The continuous small hit effect is configured to be unexecutable (see steps S90929 and S90930).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when small hits are continuously generated in a plurality of variation displays, continuous small hit effects are produced in the second and subsequent variation displays in which the consecutive small hits are generated. It can be executed (see steps S90921a to S90928). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect is determined when starting the second and subsequent variation display where the consecutive small hits are generated (steps). If it is determined to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed during the variation display.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a case where a continuous small hit effect is configured to be executable during a variable display in which a small hit has occurred is shown. Instead, it may be configured such that the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the small hit game period after the end of the variable display in which the small hit occurs.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect is determined at the start of the variable display when the consecutive small hits occur is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. . For example, when the small hit is generated, the effect control microphone computer 90200 starts the small hit game (for example, after determining “Y” in step S90983 of the background symbol fluctuation stop process shown in FIG. 48). Based on the winning determination result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is determined whether or not the next variable display to be started is a small hit, and the next variable display to be started is also small. If it is a win, processing similar to steps S90922 to S90926 shown in this embodiment is executed to determine the presence and type of the continuous small hit effect. If it is decided to execute the continuous small hit effect, the continuous small hit effect can be executed over the period from the start of the small hit game to the next variable display.

  Further, for example, when the small hit is generated, the effect control microphone computer 90200 is a period during the small hit game, and a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the small hit game (for example, during the small hit game) Any timing of the game or a timing in the middle of the small hit game, such as the timing at which the start prize is generated during the small hit game), based on the prefetch determination result command received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation display to be started next is also a small hit, the same processing as in step S90926 shown in this embodiment is performed. The presence / absence and type of the continuous small hit effect may be determined. When it is determined that the continuous small hit effect is to be executed, the continuous small hit effect may be executable over a period from the midpoint of the small hit game to the next variable display.

  Further, in this embodiment, a full tank notification may be executed when a tray from which game balls are paid out (a hit ball supply tray 903 or a surplus ball receiving tray 904) is full. For example, the amount of game balls stored in the hit ball supply tray 903 or the surplus ball receiving tray 904 can be detected by a detection means such as a sensor, and when the detection means detects that the storage amount is a predetermined amount or more, The display device 909 displays a character “full tank error” or outputs an error sound to execute a full tank notification. Here, in this embodiment, the winning ball is paid out more frequently in the big hit gaming state and the second KT state, but in the second KT state, the big hit gaming state is not paid out in a large amount at a time. Full tank condition is easily resolved. Therefore, the full tank notification execution mode may be different between the big hit gaming state and the second KT state. For example, in the second KT state, the full tank notification may be executed in a modest manner (for example, the character size of the “full tank error” is small, the error volume is small, etc.) compared to the big hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, when the storage amount exceeds the first predetermined amount, a full tank notification is executed. In the second KT state, when the storage amount exceeds a second predetermined amount greater than the first predetermined amount, a full tank notification is performed. You may make it perform. By comprising in this way, the suitable full tank alert | report according to a condition can be performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015) that can change between the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium cannot be won or difficult. And special variable winning ball apparatus 9022), which are different from the advantageous state, and special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) including the variable winning means changing to the first state. And a special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) that is frequently controlled to a special state as compared to the normal state. The variable winning means is provided so that a game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that it is controlled to a special state cannot be won (for example, delaying the flow of the game ball). This is realized by providing the nail group 55 as a delay means and setting the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the small hit game to 0.8 seconds). Further, a variable display that is not triggered by the advantageous state in the special state, a first variable display pattern whose variable display period is the first period (for example, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27 of shortening variation), The variable display period can be executed by a second variable display pattern (for example, second variation patterns # 26 and # 28 including a continuous effect) that is a second period longer than the first period. In the special state, the ratio that is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is higher than the ratio that is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. Low (for example, in the case of small hits, the ratio determined in the second variation pattern # 28 having a relatively long variation time is low (or not determined), see FIG. 23). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating and enhance the effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the special state is controlled to the special state, the related effects related to the special state (for example, the small hit notification, the continuous small hit effect, the display of the increased prize ball display, the winning effect such as the winning effect) Related production execution means capable of executing the production related to the display), and hold related to variable display that triggers control to the advantageous state among the hold information stored by the hold storage means when controlled to the advantageous state When the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the holding continuous effect) that suggests that the information is included, the previous advantageous state and the later Limiting means for restricting the execution of related effects when controlled to a special state between the advantageous state (for example, display of a small hit notification or a continuous small hit effect during the execution of the reserved continuous effect, display of a prize ball increase display, Winning performance Execution of the effect associated with Koatari like is provided with a to) and limited. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the suggestion effect execution means is controlled to the second advantageous state, the variable that becomes the trigger to be controlled to the first advantageous state in the hold information stored by the hold storage means. When the hold information regarding the display is included, the suggestive effect can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 56B). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when controlled to the first advantageous state, the holding information related to variable display that triggers the control to the first advantageous state is included in the holding information stored by the holding storage means. In this case, the suggestion effect can be executed after notifying that the advantageous state controlled this time is the second advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 56C). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, the promotion notification means (for example, effect display) capable of executing the promotion notification (for example, right-handed notification) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined route when being controlled in the special state. The device 909 is realized by displaying a “right-handed” character display, an arrow display indicating the right direction, and the like, and the promotion notification means includes a case where variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern and Further, it may be possible to execute the promotion notification in a different manner when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern (for example, a change pattern having a relatively long change time in the KT state (that is, When the variation display is executed by the second variation pattern # 26, # 28), the variation pattern of the shortened variation (that is, the second variation pattern # 25, # 27). Compared to when the variable display is executed by `` Right-handed '' character display, arrow display indicating the right direction, etc., reduced or made transparent, so as not to actively promote right-handed You can do it.) By comprising in that way, the suitable promotion alerting | reporting according to the condition can be performed.

  In this embodiment, the storage means (for example, the hit ball supply tray 903 and the surplus ball receiving tray 904) that can store the game medium and the full tank notification that indicates that the storage means is in a full tank state can be executed. Tan informing means (for example, realized by displaying the character “full tank error” in the effect display device 909 or outputting an error sound), and the full tank informing means is controlled in an advantageous state. It may be possible to change the execution mode of full tank notification between when the player is in the special state and when the player is controlled in the special state (for example, in the second KT state, it is less conservative than in the big hit gaming state) The full tank notification may be executed according to various modes (for example, the character size of “full tank error” is small, the error volume is small, etc.). In the big hit gaming state, the storage amount is the first place. It exceeds the amount, running full notification, in the first 2KT state, may exceed the amount stored second predetermined amount greater than the first predetermined amount, is also possible to execute the full notification.). By comprising in that way, suitable full tank alert | report according to a condition can be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific result (in this example, the big hit symbol), the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game) has a higher degree of advantage for the player than in the special state. State), and when the display result of variable display becomes a special result (in this example, a small hit symbol), it can be controlled to a special state. In the special state, the frequency of the special state is controlled more frequently than in the normal state (in this example, the right-handed operation is performed in the KT state, so the frequency of the second special symbol variation display is high, 2 It may be a small hit only when the special symbol variation display is executed). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game related to the special state, and to improve the interest for the game.

  In this embodiment, “high advantage” means, for example, when the player is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) or a special state (in this example, a small hit gaming state). It means that the expectation degree of acquisition of game media per time is high. For example, the variable winning ball device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 9020 and the special variable winning ball device 9022) has a long opening time or a large number of opening times, so that a lot of winnings can be obtained, A lot of prizes can be obtained, and a lot of game value can be gained.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) advantageous to the player, and based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (in this example, it was a big hit). Thus, it is possible to control to a special state (in this example, a KT state (first KT state, second KT state)) with a higher frequency of control in the special state than before the special condition is satisfied. In the special state, a special effect (in this example, a continuous small hit effect) is executed when the special state is controlled again based on the execution of the next variable display after being controlled to the special state. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game related to the special state, and to improve the interest for the game.

  In this embodiment, the count display (in this example, the number of winning balls is displayed) is updated based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won a big winning opening or special winning opening 9024). It is possible to display the first display mode (in this example, the winning ball number display by the big hit pattern), and the second display mode (in this example, the winning ball number display by the second KT pattern) that is highlighted than the first display mode. ), The count display can be updated and displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 58, in the big hit pattern during the big hit gaming state, the prize ball number display 90300 is updated and displayed at the lower left corner of the effect display device 909, As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the award ball number display 90305 is enlarged and displayed in the vicinity of the center of the effect display device 909 and the effect image 90307 is displayed and updated. Shimesuru). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when performing the update display of the count display.

  In this embodiment, a case where the number of prize balls is displayed as a count display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when any gauge display or countdown display is performed as a count display, the configuration shown in this embodiment may be applied. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the predetermined opportunity is that the game ball has won the big prize opening or the special prize opening 9024 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. An up condition may be satisfied. Further, for example, when applied to a slot machine, it may be assumed that a predetermined trigger has occurred based on the occurrence of a small combination.

  Also, in this embodiment, the award ball number display is added and displayed as the update display. However, this embodiment is not limited to such a mode, and when any count display is subtracted and displayed, You may comprise so that the structure shown with the form may be applied.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in order to notify the microcomputer 90200 for the effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode, such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous, Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90200 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses a first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called first in the case where the reach has been reached, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 selects the specific change mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, background symbols (production symbols), and normal symbols are variably displayed and the display results are derived and displayed. The variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027 and the like) are mounted are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. However, the game control microcomputer 90560 has another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 909. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention can be applied to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that there are a probable big hit and a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promising big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Frame 4A, 4B for game machines ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 901 Pachinko machine 908a First special symbol display unit 908b Second special symbol display unit 909 Production display device 909a First variable display unit 909b Second variable display unit 909c Background symbol display unit 9013 First start prize opening 9013a First start opening switch 9014 Second start winning opening 9014a Second start opening switch 9015 Variable winning ball device 9017 Operating gate 9017a Operating gate switch 9018c Symbol hold memory display unit 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 9023 Bottom Member 9024 Special prize opening 9023a First count switch 9025a Second count switch 9031 Main board 9032 Gate 9056 CPU
9080 effect control board 90200 effect control microcomputer 90201 effect control CPU
90560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
Detection means capable of detecting the player's movement;
A specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect when the effect state changes to the specific state,
The effect state is changeable toward the specific state at a plurality of timings in a predetermined period, and a first change pattern that changes based on detection of a player's action by the detecting means, and the detection The second change pattern that changes regardless of the detection of the player's movement by means,
In at least two timings of the plurality of timings, the ratio of whether the effect state changes between the first change pattern and the second change pattern is different,
further,
Variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which a game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium cannot be won or difficult;
Special state control means that is in a state different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a special state including the variable winning means changing to the first state;
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the normal state,
The variable winning means is provided so as not to win a game medium launched toward the variable winning means after being notified that the special state is controlled.
The variable display that is not triggered by the advantageous state in the special state is a first variable display pattern in which the variable display period is the first period, and a second period in which the variable display period is longer than the first period. It can be executed with the second variable display pattern,
In the special state, the ratio that is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern is controlled to the special state after the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized by a lower percentage.

Images